Prove2Me
Navigate
DiscoverCollectionsFormalpediaBlogsUsersMomentumMy Missions+
Prove2Me
⌕
Log in

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

Numerical Analysis

222 missions · 109 completed

Missions

Open113Completed109All222
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Truncated-Newton Algorithms for Large-Scale Unconstrained Optimization 1: Truncated-Newton CG Iterates Have ‖g(x_k)‖ → 0 and Converge to Any Limit Point with Positive Definite HessianResearch Paper

Motivation

Large scale unconstrained optimization often makes an exact Newton step expensive. At each iterate, Newton's method asks for a solution of a linear system involving the Hessian, and the cost of solving that system can dominate the cost of evaluating the objective. Dembo and Steihaug's 1983 truncated Newton method uses conjugate gradients to stop the linear solve early, either when the residual is small enough or when the current direction has insufficient positive curvature. The resulting direction is paired with a line search. The question for this mission is whether those early exits still give a globally reliable optimization method under the paper's assumptions. The answer, in Theorem 2.1, is that every resulting run has gradient norm tending to zero, and a positive definite Hessian at one limit point makes the whole sequence converge to that point.

Setting

The objective is a twice continuously differentiable function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R. Write g(x)=∇f(x)g(x)=\nabla f(x)g(x)=∇f(x) for its gradient and H(x)=Dg(x)H(x)=Dg(x)H(x)=Dg(x) for its Hessian. For every initial point x0x_0x0​, the paper assumes that the sublevel set L(x0)={x:f(x)≤f(x0)}L(x_0)=\{x:f(x)\le f(x_0)\}L(x0​)={x:f(x)≤f(x0​)} is bounded. The formalization uses the Euclidean norm and its inner product, so the operator norm of HHH is also Euclidean.

At a major iterate xkx_kxk​, the minor conjugate-gradient iteration starts at p0=0p_0=0p0​=0 with residual and direction r0=d0=−g(xk)r_0=d_0=-g(x_k)r0​=d0​=−g(xk​). It maintains a scalar δi\delta_iδi​, initialized to ∥r0∥2\|r_0\|^2∥r0​∥2, alongside the usual conjugate-gradient state. Before taking its next conjugate-gradient step, it checks whether ⟨di,H(xk)di⟩≤εδi\langle d_i,H(x_k)d_i\rangle\le\varepsilon\delta_i⟨di​,H(xk​)di​⟩≤εδi​. If so, it returns d0=−g(xk)d_0=-g(x_k)d0​=−g(xk​) when i=0i=0i=0 and the current approximation pip_ipi​ otherwise. If this first test fails, it takes a conjugate-gradient step and checks whether ∥ri+1∥≤ηk∥g(xk)∥\|r_{i+1}\|\le\eta_k\|g(x_k)\|∥ri+1​∥≤ηk​∥g(xk​)∥. If so, it returns pi+1p_{i+1}pi+1​. A TNCG direction is the direction returned by the first exit that occurs. The forcing value ηk\eta_kηk​ sets the residual tolerance.

The major iteration chooses a positive step length λk\lambda_kλk​. With pkp_kpk​ the minor iteration's output and 0<α<1/20<\alpha<1/20<α<1/2, α<β<1\alpha<\beta<1α<β<1, the line search requires both sufficient decrease and a curvature condition:

f(xk+λkpk)≤f(xk)+αλk⟨g(xk),pk⟩,⟨g(xk+λkpk),pk⟩≥β⟨g(xk),pk⟩.f(x_k+\lambda_k p_k)\le f(x_k)+\alpha\lambda_k\langle g(x_k),p_k\rangle, \qquad \langle g(x_k+\lambda_kp_k),p_k\rangle\ge\beta\langle g(x_k),p_k\rangle.f(xk​+λk​pk​)≤f(xk​)+αλk​⟨g(xk​),pk​⟩,⟨g(xk​+λk​pk​),pk​⟩≥β⟨g(xk​),pk​⟩.

The update is xk+1=xk+λkpkx_{k+1}=x_k+\lambda_kp_kxk+1​=xk​+λk​pk​. A run is a sequence satisfying this rule from its specified starting point. The paper also states an alternative function-value curvature condition; this mission defines it because the local unit-step theorem discusses both choices, although the main run uses the displayed gradient condition.

Formalization targets

Global convergence

For every starting point there is a TNCG run, and every run satisfies

∥g(xk)∥⟶0.\|g(x_k)\|\longrightarrow0.∥g(xk​)∥⟶0.

If x∗x^*x∗ is a limit point of that run and H(x∗)H(x^*)H(x∗) is positive definite, then

xk⟶x∗.x_k\longrightarrow x^*.xk​⟶x∗.

The existence clause is the formal meaning of the paper's assertion that the iterates are well defined. The six milestones follow the paper's appendix: the conjugate-gradient relations of Theorem A.1; the uniform descent and direction bounds of Lemma A.2; the line-search existence and directional-derivative limit used in the proof of Theorem A.3; Theorem A.3 itself; and eventual unit-step admissibility in Theorem A.4. The companion Theorem 2.2 addresses the eventual residual exit and unit-step behavior when a run converges to a point with positive definite Hessian. These results are all stated in the original paper.

Significance

The target shows that the computational shortcut in the inner linear solve preserves a global first-order guarantee: no TNCG run can maintain a gradient norm bounded away from zero. It also identifies when the sequence has one limit, rather than merely having stationary accumulation points. The local companion result describes the regime where the truncated method can take full steps and the residual stopping test governs the minor iteration.

The mathematical results are proved in the 1983 paper, while this mission's Lean statements are open proof targets. A complete formalization would connect the finite-dimensional conjugate-gradient recurrence, the line-search argument on bounded sublevel sets, and the convergence statement in one machine-checked development. The conjugate-gradient identities and line-search facts could be reused in other optimization algorithms; the exact first-exit model and the global conclusion are specific to this method.

Difficulty

The minor iteration is not an ordinary positive definite conjugate-gradient solve. The Hessian may be indefinite away from a solution, and the iteration must stop at insufficient curvature before using a later residual state. A convergence argument that assumes positive definiteness at every iterate would therefore miss the case the algorithm was designed to handle. The line search must work for the returned direction, including the first iteration's steepest-descent fallback. The limit-point conclusion adds a separate issue: a vanishing gradient norm alone does not force an entire sequence to converge to a chosen limit point.

Formalization scope

Lean represents Rn\mathbb R^nRn as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), uses its Euclidean norm and inner product, and defines H(x)H(x)H(x) as the derivative of the gradient. The objective is C2C^2C2 and every sublevel set is bounded, as specified at the start of the paper. The TNCG recurrence is total, but an admissible direction must come from its first actual exit, with the curvature test preceding the residual test. At i=0i=0i=0, the curvature exit returns −g-g−g, not the zero initial approximation. This prevents a false stationary run. The residual test is written as a product inequality, equivalent to the paper's quotient when the residual test is reached.

Step lengths are positive. A run is extended through stationary points by zero directions, giving an infinite sequence on which a limit can be stated. Theorem 2.1 imposes no extra restriction on the forcing sequence and no upper bound on step lengths. Theorem A.1 corrects the printed Krylov-space index from Hk−1gH^{k-1}gHk−1g to HkgH^kgHkg. Theorem A.4 adds g(x∗)=0g(x^*)=0g(x∗)=0, needed for the conclusion and true in the paper's applications. Theorem 2.2 requires nonnegative forcing values and guards its residual-exit conclusion at stationary iterates. These corrections are recorded item by item in the moderation notes. Contributions to the conjugate-gradient identities, bounded-level-set line search, and isolated-limit-point argument are all within scope.

Selected references

  • R. S. Dembo and T. Steihaug, Truncated-Newton algorithms for large-scale unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 26 (1983), 190–212. DOI: 10.1007/BF02592055.
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Truncated-Newton Algorithms for Large-Scale Unconstrained Optimization 2: Exact CG Meets Nonpositive Curvature Unless g Is Orthogonal to the Nonpositive Eigenspaces of HResearch Paper

Motivation

Truncated-Newton methods minimize a smooth function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb{R}^n\to\mathbb{R}f:Rn→R by taking, at each iterate xkx_kxk​, a search direction obtained by solving the Newton equation H(xk)p=−g(xk)H(x_k)p=-g(x_k)H(xk​)p=−g(xk​) only approximately, with the linear conjugate gradient (CG) method. Here ggg is the gradient and HHH the Hessian of fff. The approach was analysed by Dembo and Steihaug (Math. Programming 26, 1983), building on the inexact Newton framework of Dembo, Eisenstat and Steihaug (SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 19, 1982), and Newton–CG with curvature tests remains a standard large-scale method (Nocedal and Wright, Numerical Optimization, Ch. 7).

Away from a minimizer the Hessian need not be positive definite, and CG on an indefinite system can produce directions along which fff curves downward. The Dembo–Steihaug method stops CG when it meets such a direction. A practical question follows: started at or near a stationary point that is not a local minimizer, will the method ever notice the nonpositive curvature? Theorem 2.4 of the paper answers it for exact CG: it does, except in a degenerate case described by the eigenspaces of HHH.

Setting

Fix a symmetric linear operator HHH on Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn, with the Euclidean inner product uTvu^{\mathsf T}vuTv and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and a vector g∈Rng\in\mathbb{R}^ng∈Rn. In the paper these are H(xk)H(x_k)H(xk​) and g(xk)g(x_k)g(xk​) at the current iterate.

The TNCG minor iteration (p. 194) runs CG on Hp=−gHp=-gHp=−g from p0=0p_0=0p0​=0. Its state at iteration iii is (pi,ri,di,δi)(p_i,r_i,d_i,\delta_i)(pi​,ri​,di​,δi​):

p0=0,r0=−g,d0=r0,δ0=r0Tr0,p_0=0,\quad r_0=-g,\quad d_0=r_0,\quad \delta_0=r_0^{\mathsf T}r_0,p0​=0,r0​=−g,d0​=r0​,δ0​=r0T​r0​,

and, writing qi=Hdiq_i=Hd_iqi​=Hdi​,

αi=riTridiTqi,  pi+1=pi+αidi,  ri+1=ri−αiqi,  βi=ri+1Tri+1riTri,  di+1=ri+1+βidi,  δi+1=ri+1Tri+1+βi2δi.\alpha_i=\frac{r_i^{\mathsf T}r_i}{d_i^{\mathsf T}q_i},\ \ p_{i+1}=p_i+\alpha_id_i,\ \ r_{i+1}=r_i-\alpha_iq_i,\ \ \beta_i=\frac{r_{i+1}^{\mathsf T}r_{i+1}}{r_i^{\mathsf T}r_i},\ \ d_{i+1}=r_{i+1}+\beta_id_i,\ \ \delta_{i+1}=r_{i+1}^{\mathsf T}r_{i+1}+\beta_i^2\delta_i .αi​=diT​qi​riT​ri​​,  pi+1​=pi​+αi​di​,  ri+1​=ri​−αi​qi​,  βi​=riT​ri​ri+1T​ri+1​​,  di+1​=ri+1​+βi​di​,  δi+1​=ri+1T​ri+1​+βi2​δi​.

At iteration iii the method first applies the curvature test (2.1), diTHdi≤ε δid_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_i\le\varepsilon\,\delta_idiT​Hdi​≤εδi​, and stops if it holds; otherwise it computes ri+1r_{i+1}ri+1​ and applies the truncation test (2.2), ∥ri+1∥/∥g∥≤η\|r_{i+1}\|/\|g\|\le\eta∥ri+1​∥/∥g∥≤η, and stops if it holds. With ε=η=0\varepsilon=\eta=0ε=η=0, (2.1) reads diTHdi≤0d_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_i\le0diT​Hdi​≤0 and (2.2) reads ri+1=0r_{i+1}=0ri+1​=0. The method exits through (2.1) at iii when no test fired at any iteration j<ij<ij<i and (2.1) holds at iii.

For μ∈R\mu\in\mathbb{R}μ∈R the eigenspace is E(μ,H)={v:Hv=μv}E(\mu,H)=\{v: Hv=\mu v\}E(μ,H)={v:Hv=μv} (A.21). The span of vectors v1,…,vmv_1,\dots,v_mv1​,…,vm​ is written [v1,…,vm][v_1,\dots,v_m][v1​,…,vm​]; the Krylov space of ggg is [g,Hg,…,Hmg][g,Hg,\dots,H^{m}g][g,Hg,…,Hmg].

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2.4 (p. 197)

Let ηk=ε=0\eta_k=\varepsilon=0ηk​=ε=0. If HHH is not positive definite, then either the minor iteration exits through (2.1) at some iteration iii, so that

diTHdi≤0at an iteration i the method reaches,d_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_i\le 0 \quad\text{at an iteration } i \text{ the method reaches},diT​Hdi​≤0at an iteration i the method reaches,

or

gTv=0for every v with Hv=μv, μ≤0.g^{\mathsf T}v=0\quad\text{for every } v \text{ with } Hv=\mu v,\ \mu\le0 .gTv=0for every v with Hv=μv, μ≤0.

Milestones

  1. Theorem A.1, (A.2) and (A.5), at ε=0\varepsilon=0ε=0 (p. 206). If diTHdi>0d_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_i>0diT​Hdi​>0 for i=0,…,ki=0,\dots,ki=0,…,k, then diTHdj=0d_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_j=0diT​Hdj​=0 for i≠j≤ki\ne j\le ki=j≤k, and [d0,…,dk]=[g,Hg,…,Hkg][d_0,\dots,d_k]=[g,Hg,\dots,H^kg][d0​,…,dk​]=[g,Hg,…,Hkg].
  2. Theorem A.5 (p. 210). If ggg has a nonzero projection on each eigenspace of HHH, kkk is the number of distinct eigenvalues, and vectors d0,…,dk−1d_0,\dots,d_{k-1}d0​,…,dk−1​ are HHH-conjugate with (di,Hdi)>0(d_i,Hd_i)>0(di​,Hdi​)>0 and span [g,…,Hk−1g][g,\dots,H^{k-1}g][g,…,Hk−1g], then HHH is positive definite.
  3. The first sentence of the proof of Theorem 2.4 (p. 211). If ggg is not orthogonal to any eigenspace of HHH, and exact CG passes the curvature test up to iteration iii and ends with ri+1=0r_{i+1}=0ri+1​=0, then HHH is positive definite.

Significance

The theorem is the theoretical justification, given in the paper on p. 197, for using the direction of negative curvature did_idi​ produced in case (ii) of the minor iteration: with exact arithmetic and no truncation, CG either produces a direction of nonpositive curvature or the gradient lies entirely in the span of eigenvectors with positive eigenvalues. The paper draws the consequence that if xk→x∗x_k\to x^*xk​→x∗ and the method terminates through (2.2), then, outside this rare case, x∗x^*x∗ is a strong local minimizer. Theorem A.5 is a self-contained statement about conjugate families in Krylov spaces, usable in any analysis of CG on indefinite systems.

The result is proved in the paper (Appendix, pp. 206–211), with the CG relations of Theorem A.1 cited from Hestenes and Stiefel. No machine-checked proof of these statements is known to this mission. Formalizing them produces a Lean development of CG on a symmetric, possibly indefinite operator, with its conjugacy and Krylov-span relations, which classical treatments state only for positive definite systems.

Difficulty

The CG relations of Theorem A.1 are usually proved for positive definite HHH, where every denominator is positive. Here HHH is indefinite, and the relations hold only as long as the curvature along the directions has stayed positive; the induction must carry that hypothesis and must also show the residuals do not vanish early. The passage from "CG ended with r=0r=0r=0" to a statement about all eigenspaces is the second obstacle: the CG run sees only the Krylov space of ggg, so one must relate that space to the eigenspaces that ggg meets, using symmetry of HHH and a count of distinct eigenvalues. A direct argument via "the directions span Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn" fails, because when ggg misses an eigenspace the Krylov space is a proper subspace.

Formalization scope

Rn\mathbb{R}^nRn is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); HHH is a continuous linear map that is self-adjoint (IsSelfAdjoint H), as the paper's HHH is a Hessian. Positive definiteness is vTHv>0v^{\mathsf T}Hv>0vTHv>0 for all v≠0v\ne0v=0. The CG recursion is total and carries no stopping test; division by zero returns 000 in Lean, so states after a would-be stop are junk, and the statements read the iteration only through first-exit predicates. The test (2.2) is encoded in the product form ∥ri+1∥≤η∥g∥\|r_{i+1}\|\le\eta\|g\|∥ri+1​∥≤η∥g∥.

Theorem 2.4 is stated for an arbitrary symmetric HHH and vector ggg rather than at an iterate of a run of the full algorithm. It uses nothing else about fff or the run, and every such pair occurs as the Hessian and gradient of an admissible objective. The paper's (A.5) prints Hk−1gH^{k-1}gHk−1g as the last Krylov vector; the correct HkgH^kgHkg is used.

A trivializing formalization exists and is ruled out: the first alternative is not "diTHdi≤0d_i^{\mathsf T}Hd_i\le0diT​Hdi​≤0 for some iii" over the unstopped recursion, which holds automatically once a residual vanishes (the recursion then continues with d=0d=0d=0); it requires that iteration iii is reached with no earlier exit. The goal does not assume conjugacy, the Krylov span identity, or the hypotheses of Theorem A.5.

A complete development needs the spectral theorem for self-adjoint operators on finite-dimensional spaces (in Mathlib), finiteness of the set of eigenvalues, and the CG invariants. The CG lemmas are reusable for any Newton–CG or trust-region CG analysis. Proofs of the milestones, and of auxiliary CG invariants such as (A.3)–(A.4), are welcome.

Selected references

  • R. S. Dembo and T. Steihaug, Truncated-Newton algorithms for large-scale unconstrained optimization, Mathematical Programming 26 (1983) 190–212. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02592055
  • R. S. Dembo, S. C. Eisenstat and T. Steihaug, Inexact Newton methods, SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis 19 (1982) 400–408. https://doi.org/10.1137/0719025
  • M. R. Hestenes and E. Stiefel, Methods of conjugate gradients for solving linear systems, Journal of Research of the National Bureau of Standards 49 (1952) 409–436. https://doi.org/10.6028/jres.049.044
  • T. Steihaug, The conjugate gradient method and trust regions in large scale optimization, SIAM Journal on Numerical Analysis 20 (1983) 626–637. https://doi.org/10.1137/0720042
  • J. Nocedal and S. J. Wright, Numerical Optimization, 2nd ed., Springer, 2006. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-0-387-40065-5
5 thms1 active userReviewed
Optimization·Captain: mikedeng1

On the Convergence of Interior-Reflective Newton Methods for Nonlinear Minimization Subject to Bounds 1: The Interior-Reflective Line Search Algorithm Drives D_k²g_k to ZeroResearch Paper

Motivation

Minimizing a smooth function subject to simple bounds on the variables, l≤x≤ul\le x\le ul≤x≤u, is one of the most common problems in nonlinear optimization: it arises on its own (nonnegativity constraints, box-constrained least squares, parameter estimation with physical ranges) and as the subproblem of augmented Lagrangian and penalty methods. The classical approaches are active-set methods, which follow the boundary of the box and must guess which bounds are tight, and projected-gradient methods, which project trial points onto the box.

Coleman and Li proposed an alternative that never touches the boundary: an interior-reflective Newton method. Every iterate is strictly feasible; a new affine scaling D(x)D(x)D(x) measures how far each variable is from the bound its gradient points toward; and the line search follows a reflective path, which bounces off the faces of the box instead of stopping at them or being projected back. The method is the basis of the trust-region-reflective algorithm in MATLAB's Optimization Toolbox (fmincon, lsqnonlin), so its convergence theory underlies a widely used solver.

Timeline:

  • 1992–1994: Coleman and Li introduce the interior-reflective approach and analyse its convergence (Math. Programming 67, 1994), proving first-order global convergence (Theorem 8) and local quadratic convergence (Theorem 13).
  • 1996: Coleman and Li extend the approach to trust-region subproblems (SIAM J. Optim. 6, 1996), the version implemented in MATLAB.

This mission is the first of two drawn from the 1994 paper; the second treats the local quadratic rate.

Setting

The problem (1.1) is

min⁡x∈Rnf(x)subject tol≤x≤u,\min_{x\in\mathbb R^n} f(x)\quad\text{subject to}\quad l\le x\le u,x∈Rnmin​f(x)subject tol≤x≤u,

with l∈(R∪{−∞})nl\in(\mathbb R\cup\{-\infty\})^nl∈(R∪{−∞})n, u∈(R∪{+∞})nu\in(\mathbb R\cup\{+\infty\})^nu∈(R∪{+∞})n, l≤ul\le ul≤u. The feasible box is F={x:l≤x≤u}\mathcal F=\{x:l\le x\le u\}F={x:l≤x≤u} and its strict interior is int⁡(F)={x:l<x<u}\operatorname{int}(\mathcal F)=\{x:l<x<u\}int(F)={x:l<x<u}. Write g(x)=∇f(x)g(x)=\nabla f(x)g(x)=∇f(x) and H(x)=∇2f(x)H(x)=\nabla^2 f(x)H(x)=∇2f(x), and gk=g(xk)g_k=g(x_k)gk​=g(xk​), Hk=H(xk)H_k=H(x_k)Hk​=H(xk​) along a sequence.

The standing assumption (p. 191): for the starting point x1x_1x1​, the level set L={x∈F:f(x)≤f(x1)}\mathcal L=\{x\in\mathcal F: f(x)\le f(x_1)\}L={x∈F:f(x)≤f(x1​)} is compact, and fff is twice continuously differentiable on an open set D⊇FD\supseteq\mathcal FD⊇F.

The scaling vector v(x)v(x)v(x) (Definition 2) has components vi=xi−uiv_i=x_i-u_ivi​=xi​−ui​ if gi<0g_i<0gi​<0 and ui<∞u_i<\inftyui​<∞; vi=xi−liv_i=x_i-l_ivi​=xi​−li​ if gi≥0g_i\ge0gi​≥0 and li>−∞l_i>-\inftyli​>−∞; vi=−1v_i=-1vi​=−1 if gi<0g_i<0gi​<0 and ui=∞u_i=\inftyui​=∞; vi=1v_i=1vi​=1 if gi≥0g_i\ge0gi​≥0 and li=−∞l_i=-\inftyli​=−∞. The scaling matrix is D(x)=diag⁡(∣v(x)∣1/2)D(x)=\operatorname{diag}(|v(x)|^{1/2})D(x)=diag(∣v(x)∣1/2), and Dk=D(xk)D_k=D(x_k)Dk​=D(xk​). The system D(x)2g(x)=0D(x)^2g(x)=0D(x)2g(x)=0 is equivalent to the first-order optimality conditions of (1.1).

The reflective transformation RRR (Fig. 6) folds Rn\mathbb R^nRn onto F\mathcal FF coordinate by coordinate: a coordinate with one finite bound is reflected about it, and a coordinate with two finite bounds is folded periodically (a triangle wave between lil_ili​ and uiu_iui​). The reflective path from xxx in the direction sss is p(α)=R(x+αs)−xp(\alpha)=R(x+\alpha s)-xp(α)=R(x+αs)−x: it moves along sss and reverses the corresponding component of the direction whenever it meets a face. A breakpoint is a stepsize at which the path lies on the boundary.

The interior-reflective algorithm (Fig. 9), with 0<σl<σu<10<\sigma_l<\sigma_u<10<σl​<σu​<1 and ρ>0\rho>0ρ>0, starts at x1∈int⁡(F)x_1\in\operatorname{int}(\mathcal F)x1​∈int(F); at each step it chooses a descent direction sks_ksk​ and a stepsize αk>0\alpha_k>0αk​>0 that is not a breakpoint and satisfies

f(xk+1)<f(xk)+σl(αkgkTsk+12αk2min⁡(skTHksk,0))(3.4)f(x_{k+1})<f(x_k)+\sigma_l\big(\alpha_kg_k^{T}s_k+\tfrac12\alpha_k^2\min(s_k^{T}H_ks_k,0)\big)\qquad(3.4)f(xk+1​)<f(xk​)+σl​(αk​gkT​sk​+21​αk2​min(skT​Hk​sk​,0))(3.4)

and either

f(xk+1)>f(xk)+σu(αkgkTsk+12αk2min⁡(skTHksk,0))(3.5)f(x_{k+1})>f(x_k)+\sigma_u\big(\alpha_kg_k^{T}s_k+\tfrac12\alpha_k^2\min(s_k^{T}H_ks_k,0)\big)\qquad(3.5)f(xk+1​)>f(xk​)+σu​(αk​gkT​sk​+21​αk2​min(skT​Hk​sk​,0))(3.5)

or αk>ρ\alpha_k>\rhoαk​>ρ; then xk+1=xk+pk(αk)x_{k+1}=x_k+p_k(\alpha_k)xk+1​=xk​+pk​(αk​).

The directions {sk}\{s_k\}{sk​} are constraint-compatible (Definition 3) if {Dk−2sk}\{D_k^{-2}s_k\}{Dk−2​sk​} is bounded, and consistent (Definition 4) if skTgk→0s_k^{T}g_k\to0skT​gk​→0 implies Dkgk→0D_kg_k\to0Dk​gk​→0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8

If {xk}\{x_k\}{xk​} is generated by the algorithm of Fig. 9 and {sk}\{s_k\}{sk​} is both consistent and constraint-compatible, then

Dk2gk→0andαk2min⁡(skTHksk,0)→0.D_k^2g_k\to0\qquad\text{and}\qquad\alpha_k^2\min(s_k^{T}H_ks_k,0)\to0 .Dk2​gk​→0andαk2​min(skT​Hk​sk​,0)→0.

No constants are involved; the statement is the paper's.

Milestones

  1. The iterates stay in L\mathcal LL and f(xk)f(x_k)f(xk​) strictly decreases (proof of Theorem 8, p. 207).
  2. Theorem 3: constraint compatibility bounds the breakpoints BRk(j)=∣vkj∣/∣skj∣BR_k(j)=|v_{kj}|/|s_{kj}|BRk​(j)=∣vkj​∣/∣skj​∣ away from zero.
  3. Lemma 7, in its one-sided form: if αk→0\alpha_k\to0αk​→0, then f(xk+1)−f(xk)≤αkgkTsk+Cαk2f(x_{k+1})-f(x_k)\le\alpha_kg_k^{T}s_k+C\alpha_k^2f(xk+1​)−f(xk​)≤αk​gkT​sk​+Cαk2​ eventually.
  4. αkgkTsk→0\alpha_kg_k^{T}s_k\to0αk​gkT​sk​→0 and αk2min⁡(skTHksk,0)→0\alpha_k^2\min(s_k^{T}H_ks_k,0)\to0αk2​min(skT​Hk​sk​,0)→0 (proof of Theorem 8, p. 208).
  5. gkTsk→0g_k^{T}s_k\to0gkT​sk​→0 for constraint-compatible directions (proof of Theorem 8, p. 208).

Companion results: Theorem 2 (the acceptable stepsize interval exists, so the algorithm is well defined), and Theorems 5 (1)–(2) and 6 (1)–(2) (the scaled steepest-descent directions −Dk2gk-D_k^2g_k−Dk2​gk​ and −Dk2sgn⁡(gk)-D_k^2\operatorname{sgn}(g_k)−Dk2​sgn(gk​) are constraint-compatible and consistent).

Significance

Theorem 8 is the global first-order convergence theorem of the interior-reflective approach. With Theorems 5 and 6 it shows that the simplest instance, scaled steepest descent along the reflective path, reaches first-order points from any strictly feasible start; the paper's later second-order and quadratic results for the trust-region variant are built on it. Constraint compatibility and consistency isolate exactly what a search direction must satisfy, so the theorem applies to any direction rule that can be checked against these two conditions.

The result has been proved since 1994 but, to our knowledge, not machine-checked. A formalization requires a precise model of the reflective path, which the paper describes by an algorithm (Fig. 4) and a coordinate formula (Fig. 6), and a careful treatment of points where the scaling degenerates. The formal statements also make explicit a point the printed text leaves loose: Lemma 7 is printed as an equality but only an inequality holds, and only the inequality is used.

Difficulty

The argument has the shape of a standard sufficient-decrease proof, but the step that is routine for straight-line searches fails here. The path is not a line: as α\alphaα grows, components of the direction are reversed at breakpoints, so f(xk+pk(α))−f(xk)f(x_k+p_k(\alpha))-f(x_k)f(xk​+pk​(α))−f(xk​) is not αgkTsk+O(α2)\alpha g_k^{T}s_k+O(\alpha^2)αgkT​sk​+O(α2) in general, since a reflected component changes the linear term by an amount of order α\alphaα. Lemma 7 must show that, for constraint-compatible directions, only components whose reflection decreases the linear term can be reflected at small steps, and the Taylor remainders must be controlled uniformly over a run, on a neighbourhood of the compact level set inside the open set where fff is C2C^2C2. The scaling also degenerates at the boundary, where vvv vanishes; the iterates must be kept strictly interior for Dk−2D_k^{-2}Dk−2​ to be meaningful.

Formalization scope

Points are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n); the bounds are EReal vectors with li≠+∞l_i\neq+\inftyli​=+∞, ui≠−∞u_i\neq-\inftyui​=−∞ and l≤ul\le ul≤u. The box and the level set are the published LewisTorczon.BoundPS.box and levelSet. The gradient is Mathlib's gradient, and sTH(x)ss^{T}H(x)ssTH(x)s is the inner product of the derivative of the gradient map applied to sss with sss. D(x)D(x)D(x) is never formed as a matrix: D2gD^2gD2g, DgDgDg, D−2sD^{-2}sD−2s and D2sgn⁡(g)D^2\operatorname{sgn}(g)D2sgn(g) are written componentwise. The reflective path is R(x+αs)−xR(x+\alpha s)-xR(x+αs)−x with RRR the transformation of Fig. 6, which the paper describes as the same method as Fig. 4 in another notation (p. 199); "not a breakpoint" is the requirement that the new iterate be interior. Descent direction is footnote 3's: strict decrease along the path for all small α>0\alpha>0α>0. Sequences start at index 0, which is the paper's x1x_1x1​. The standing compactness and smoothness assumption is carried as explicit hypotheses.

The goal does not assume gkTsk→0g_k^{T}s_k\to0gkT​sk​→0, αk→0\alpha_k\to0αk​→0, or anything about breakpoints; a version of Theorem 8 that did, or one whose algorithm projected onto the box instead of reflecting, or whose run predicate no sequence can satisfy, would not be the paper's theorem. Lemma 7 keeps the paper's assumption αk→0\alpha_k\to0αk​→0 and records the one-sided upper bound established by its proof. Theorem 3 uses the breakpoint distance in the direction of motion and applies its bound when that distance equals ∣vkj∣/∣skj∣|v_{kj}|/|s_{kj}|∣vkj​∣/∣skj​∣.

A complete development needs Taylor's theorem with uniform remainder along piecewise linear paths in a box, and basic facts about the reflection RRR (it maps into F\mathcal FF, is the identity on F\mathcal FF, and is continuous). These are reusable for any reflective or projected line search. Proofs of the milestones in any order are welcome, as are independent proofs of the companion results.

Selected references

  • T. F. Coleman and Y. Li, On the convergence of interior-reflective Newton methods for nonlinear minimization subject to bounds, Mathematical Programming 67 (1994), 189–224. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01582221
  • T. F. Coleman and Y. Li, An interior trust region approach for nonlinear minimization subject to bounds, SIAM Journal on Optimization 6 (1996), 418–445. https://doi.org/10.1137/0806023
  • R. M. Lewis and V. Torczon, Pattern search algorithms for bound constrained minimization, SIAM Journal on Optimization 9 (1999), 1082–1099 (source of the published box and level-set definitions reused here). https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623496300507
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projected Newton Methods for Optimization Problems with Simple Constraints: The Projected Newton Method Converges Superlinearly to the Minimum of a Convex Function over the Nonnegative OrthantResearch Paper

Motivation

Smooth optimization with nonnegative variables appears when the variables are Lagrange multipliers for inequality constraints or when an objective incorporates an augmented Lagrangian or an exact penalty. Bertsekas studies how to retain a Newton-like convergence rate in this setting while using an iteration that projects a scaled gradient step onto the nonnegative orthant. His 1982 paper also discusses large optimal-control examples, where repeatedly solving a quadratic subproblem may be costly. These are the applications motivating the method, rather than assumptions of the theorem. Bertsekas, 1982.

The paper contrasts a partly diagonal scaling matrix with two other approaches: a fully diagonal projected gradient step, which generally has a linear rate, and a constrained Newton step defined by a quadratic program. The main theoretical question is whether the simpler projected iteration can still identify binding coordinates and converge superlinearly near the solution. The mission covers the nonnegative-orthant method in §2 and its stated convergence results. The paper's later extension to general linear constraints and its computational examples concern different objects. Bertsekas, 1982.

Setting

Fix a dimension n≥1n\ge1n≥1 and a continuously differentiable function f:Rn→Rf:\mathbb R^n\to\mathbb Rf:Rn→R. Problem (1) minimizes f(x)f(x)f(x) over the nonnegative orthant R+n={x:xi≥0 for every i}\mathbb R_+^n=\{x:x^i\ge0\text{ for every }i\}R+n​={x:xi≥0 for every i}. The positive part [z]+[z]^+[z]+ replaces each negative coordinate of zzz by zero. A feasible xxx is critical when every partial derivative ∂if(x)\partial_i f(x)∂i​f(x) is nonnegative and ∂if(x)=0\partial_i f(x)=0∂i​f(x)=0 wherever xi>0x^i>0xi>0. This is the paper's componentwise first-order condition.

For a feasible iterate xkx_kxk​, the binding set is B(xk)={i:xki=0}B(x_k)=\{i:x_k^i=0\}B(xk​)={i:xki​=0}. The paper selects a larger working set Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ using a fixed ε>0\varepsilon>0ε>0 and the projected-gradient residual wk=∥xk−[xk−M∇f(xk)]+∥w_k=\|x_k-[x_k-M\nabla f(x_k)]^+\|wk​=∥xk​−[xk​−M∇f(xk​)]+∥, where MMM is fixed, diagonal and positive definite. More precisely, Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ contains the indices with 0≤xki≤min⁡(ε,wk)0\le x_k^i\le\min(\varepsilon,w_k)0≤xki​≤min(ε,wk​) and ∂if(xk)>0\partial_i f(x_k)>0∂i​f(xk​)>0. The matrix DkD_kDk​ is symmetric positive definite and has zero off-diagonal entries in the rows indexed by Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. The projected arc and update are

pk=Dk∇f(xk),xk(a)=[xk−apk]+,xk+1=xk(βmk).p_k=D_k\nabla f(x_k),\qquad x_k(a)=[x_k-a p_k]^+,\qquad x_{k+1}=x_k(\beta^{m_k}).pk​=Dk​∇f(xk​),xk​(a)=[xk​−apk​]+,xk+1​=xk​(βmk​).

Here 0<β<10<\beta<10<β<1, and mkm_kmk​ is the first nonnegative integer passing the paper's two-sum Armijo test (37), with 0<σ<1/20<\sigma<1/20<σ<1/2. One sum uses the scaled gradient outside Ik+I_k^+Ik+​; the other uses the actual projected displacement on Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. These details define the algorithm whose rate is at issue. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 228–229.

Formalization targets

The first targets establish the fixed-point and descent properties of the projected arc, positivity of the Armijo right-hand side, well-defined step selection, criticality of limit points, and local attraction with finite binding-set identification. Proposition 3 identifies both the working set and the actual binding set:

Ik+=B(xk)=B(x∗)for all sufficiently late k.I_k^+=B(x_k)=B(x^*)\quad\text{for all sufficiently late }k.Ik+​=B(xk​)=B(x∗)for all sufficiently late k.

The goal is Proposition 4. Let fff be convex and C2C^2C2, let x∗x^*x∗ be the unique minimizer on R+n\mathbb R_+^nR+n​ satisfying Assumption (C), and suppose the Hessian quadratic form has uniform positive lower and finite upper bounds on the initial, unrestricted sublevel set. The scaling matrix is Dk=Hk−1D_k=H_k^{-1}Dk​=Hk−1​, where HkH_kHk​ retains Hessian entries except for off-diagonal entries touching Ik+I_k^+Ik+​. Then

xk⟶x∗,∀c>0 ∃K ∀k≥K: ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤c∥xk−x∗∥.x_k\longrightarrow x^*,\qquad \forall c>0\ \exists K\ \forall k\ge K:\ \|x_{k+1}-x^*\|\le c\|x_k-x^*\|.xk​⟶x∗,∀c>0 ∃K ∀k≥K: ∥xk+1​−x∗∥≤c∥xk​−x∗∥.

If the Hessian is Lipschitz in a neighborhood of x∗x^*x∗, the same proposition states an at-least-quadratic error bound: ∥xk+1−x∗∥≤C∥xk−x∗∥2\|x_{k+1}-x^*\|\le C\|x_k-x^*\|^2∥xk+1​−x∗∥≤C∥xk​−x∗∥2 eventually for some C>0C>0C>0. The separate final milestone records the paper's claim that the initial unit trial is eventually accepted. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 233–236.

Significance

Proposition 4 says that this specific orthant-projected Newton iteration converges to the unique constrained optimum with a superlinear rate under its stated smoothness and curvature conditions. Proposition 3 supplies a distinct finite-identification statement: the working and binding coordinates eventually match those at the optimum. These facts specify the behavior of an algorithm that does not define its direction by solving a quadratic program at every step. The paper proves the preceding propositions and states Proposition 4 with its proof left to the reader, referring to its earlier discussion and standard unconstrained Newton results. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 234–236.

Formalizing the claims would provide machine-checked statements and, once solved, proofs for the exact projected arc, two-part line search, matrix selection, identification result and rate conclusion. The local mission items are open proof obligations; their compilation checks the definitions and theorem types, not the mathematical claims. The geometry definitions can also support other orthant-constrained algorithms, while the enlarged working set and Armijo rule belong to this paper's method.

Difficulty

A positive definite matrix by itself does not make projection along [x−aD∇f(x)]+[x-aD\nabla f(x)]^+[x−aD∇f(x)]+ a descent move. An off-diagonal coupling can push coordinates against the boundary in a way that defeats the usual unconstrained descent calculation; the paper gives such a situation before Proposition 1. The partly diagonal condition is therefore substantive. A second obstacle is that the exact active set I+(x)I^+(x)I+(x) can jump at a boundary point: iterates approaching that point from the interior need not have the same indexed rows. The enlarged Ik+I_k^+Ik+​ and its dependence on the residual are central to the finite-identification and rate claims. Bertsekas, 1982, pp. 225–229.

Formalization scope

Lean represents Rn\mathbb R^nRn as EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n), with the Euclidean norm and zero-based coordinates. The dimension is positive. gradient and the derivative of gradient represent first and second derivatives; the paper's MMM is diag μ with every μi>0\mu^i>0μi>0. The run predicate includes a feasible initial point and the first acceptable integer mkm_kmk​, and the matrix choices are indexed by iteration. Propositions 1–3 use the paper's explicit admissibility condition. Proposition 4 constructs DkD_kDk​ from HkH_kHk​ and does not assume its invertibility, admissibility, convergence or eventual active-set equality.

Assumption (C) includes local C2C^2C2 smoothness, curvature bounds on directions zero at the binding coordinates, and strict complementarity. A local minimum is required to be feasible as well as locally minimal on the orthant. Limit points use subsequential convergence. Superlinearity uses a uniform eventual error inequality, which also covers an iterate that reaches the solution exactly; a ratio with a zero denominator would distort this case. The paper's Proposition 4 display mistakenly binds a direction to the level set while leaving the Hessian's point free. The formalization states the intended reading: every point in the unrestricted initial level set and every direction satisfy the Hessian bounds. The displayed level set has no x≥0x\ge0x≥0 restriction, so neither does the Lean hypothesis.

A definition that accepts any Armijo exponent or a goal that assumes the eventual identification or convergence conclusion would erase the paper's claim. Contributions can build the matrix and projected-arc lemmas, the convergence and identification proofs, and the final rate proof. The local inverse-Hessian observation before Proposition 4 is discussed in the notes but has no separate milestone until its full local setting can be captured without weakening it.

Selected references

  • Dimitri P. Bertsekas, Projected Newton Methods for Optimization Problems with Simple Constraints, SIAM Journal on Control and Optimization 20(2), 221–246, 1982. DOI: 10.1137/0320018.
9 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear algebraOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Projection-like Retractions on Matrix Manifolds IV: Within σ_r(X̄)/2 of a Rank-r Matrix, the Truncated SVD Is the Unique Nearest Matrix of Rank Exactly rResearch Paper

Motivation

Optimization over sets of matrices of fixed rank comes up in low-rank matrix completion, model reduction, and the low-rank approximation of solutions of large matrix equations. A standard approach treats the constraint set as a Riemannian manifold and runs gradient or Newton-type methods on it (Absil, Mahony & Sepulchre 2008). Each iteration takes a step in the tangent space and then has to return to the manifold. A map that does this to first order is called a retraction, and its cost is often what decides whether a manifold method is practical.

Absil and Malick (2012) study retractions defined by projection: step to X+ZX+ZX+Z in the ambient space, then take the nearest point of the manifold. Their Proposition 3.2 shows that for any CkC^kCk submanifold (k≥2k\ge2k≥2) this projective retraction is a retraction. Section 3.2 makes it explicit for the manifold of fixed-rank matrices: near any matrix of rank rrr, the nearest matrix of rank exactly rrr is the truncated singular value decomposition (Proposition 3.3). Section 4.4 also gives a closed form for a second retraction on the same manifold, the orthographic retraction (Proposition 4.11).

Setting

Fix natural numbers nnn, mmm and r≥1r\ge1r≥1. The space Rn×m\mathbb R^{n\times m}Rn×m of real n×mn\times mn×m matrices carries the Frobenius norm ∥X∥2=∑i,jXij2=trace⁡(X⊤X)\|X\|^2=\sum_{i,j}X_{ij}^2=\operatorname{trace}(X^\top X)∥X∥2=∑i,j​Xij2​=trace(X⊤X) (3.6). The fixed-rank set is

Rr={X∈Rn×m: rank⁡(X)=r},\mathcal R_r=\{X\in\mathbb R^{n\times m}:\ \operatorname{rank}(X)=r\},Rr​={X∈Rn×m: rank(X)=r},

a smooth submanifold of Rn×m\mathbb R^{n\times m}Rn×m. It is not closed: its closure is the set of matrices of rank at most rrr.

A singular value decomposition (3.5) of XXX is a factorization X=UΣV⊤X=U\Sigma V^\topX=UΣV⊤ in which U=[u1,…,un]∈Rn×nU=[u_1,\dots,u_n]\in\mathbb R^{n\times n}U=[u1​,…,un​]∈Rn×n and V=[v1,…,vm]∈Rm×mV=[v_1,\dots,v_m]\in\mathbb R^{m\times m}V=[v1​,…,vm​]∈Rm×m are orthogonal and Σ∈Rn×m\Sigma\in\mathbb R^{n\times m}Σ∈Rn×m is zero off its diagonal. The diagonal of Σ\SigmaΣ holds the singular values of XXX in nonincreasing order,

σ1(X)≥σ2(X)≥⋯≥σmin⁡{n,m}(X)≥0,\sigma_1(X)\ge\sigma_2(X)\ge\cdots\ge\sigma_{\min\{n,m\}}(X)\ge0,σ1​(X)≥σ2​(X)≥⋯≥σmin{n,m}​(X)≥0,

and σi(X)=0\sigma_i(X)=0σi​(X)=0 for i>min⁡{n,m}i>\min\{n,m\}i>min{n,m}. A matrix has rank rrr exactly when σr(X)>0=σr+1(X)\sigma_r(X)>0=\sigma_{r+1}(X)σr​(X)>0=σr+1​(X). The truncated SVD of rank rrr is X^=∑i=1rσi(X)uivi⊤\hat X=\sum_{i=1}^r\sigma_i(X)u_iv_i^\topX^=∑i=1r​σi​(X)ui​vi⊤​ (3.7).

For a set QQQ and a point XXX, the projection PQ(X)P_Q(X)PQ​(X) is the set of nearest points: the Y∈QY\in QY∈Q with ∥X−Y∥≤∥X−W∥\|X-Y\|\le\|X-W\|∥X−Y∥≤∥X−W∥ for all W∈QW\in QW∈Q. For a set that is not closed, PQ(X)P_Q(X)PQ​(X) may be empty or contain several points.

Formalization targets

Goal: Proposition 3.3

Let Xˉ∈Rr\bar X\in\mathcal R_rXˉ∈Rr​. For every XXX with ∥X−Xˉ∥<σr(Xˉ)/2\|X-\bar X\|<\sigma_r(\bar X)/2∥X−Xˉ∥<σr​(Xˉ)/2 and every singular value decomposition X=UΣV⊤X=U\Sigma V^\topX=UΣV⊤,

PRr(X)={∑i=1rσi(X) uivi⊤}.P_{\mathcal R_r}(X)=\Bigl\{\sum_{i=1}^r\sigma_i(X)\,u_iv_i^\top\Bigr\}.PRr​​(X)={i=1∑r​σi​(X)ui​vi⊤​}.

The projection exists, is unique, and is the truncated SVD. The radius σr(Xˉ)/2\sigma_r(\bar X)/2σr​(Xˉ)/2 and the strict inequality are those of the paper.

Milestones

The paper's proof goes through four claims, which are the milestones in attack order:

  1. Weyl's bound (§3.2, proof of Proposition 3.3, citing Horn–Johnson 7.3.8): ∣σi(Xˉ)−σi(X)∣≤∥X−Xˉ∥|\sigma_i(\bar X)-\sigma_i(X)|\le\|X-\bar X\|∣σi​(Xˉ)−σi​(X)∣≤∥X−Xˉ∥ for every i≥1i\ge1i≥1.
  2. Eckart–Young (3.7): for every singular value decomposition of XXX, X^\hat XX^ is a nearest matrix to XXX of rank at most rrr.
  3. The gap (3.8): if rank⁡Xˉ=r\operatorname{rank}\bar X=rrankXˉ=r and ∥X−Xˉ∥<σr(Xˉ)/2\|X-\bar X\|<\sigma_r(\bar X)/2∥X−Xˉ∥<σr​(Xˉ)/2, then σr+1(X)<σr(Xˉ)/2<σr(X)\sigma_{r+1}(X)<\sigma_r(\bar X)/2<\sigma_r(X)σr+1​(X)<σr​(Xˉ)/2<σr​(X).
  4. Uniqueness under a gap (§3.2, proof of Proposition 3.3, citing Helmke–Moore): if σr(X)>σr+1(X)\sigma_r(X)>\sigma_{r+1}(X)σr​(X)>σr+1​(X), then X^\hat XX^ is the only nearest matrix of rank at most rrr.

Further result: Proposition 4.11

Write X=U[Σ0000]V⊤X=U\left[\begin{smallmatrix}\Sigma_0&0\\0&0\end{smallmatrix}\right]V^\topX=U[Σ0​0​00​]V⊤ (4.7), with Σ0\Sigma_0Σ0​ the positive diagonal of nonzero singular values, and a tangent vector Z=U[ACB0]V⊤Z=U\left[\begin{smallmatrix}A&C\\B&0\end{smallmatrix}\right]V^\topZ=U[AB​C0​]V⊤ (4.8). If Σ0+A\Sigma_0+AΣ0​+A is invertible, the orthographic retraction is

R(X,Z)=U[Σ0+ACBB(Σ0+A)−1C]V⊤.R(X,Z)=U\begin{bmatrix}\Sigma_0+A&C\\B&B(\Sigma_0+A)^{-1}C\end{bmatrix}V^\top .R(X,Z)=U[Σ0​+AB​CB(Σ0​+A)−1C​]V⊤.

Here R(X,Z)R(X,Z)R(X,Z) is the nearest point to X+ZX+ZX+Z of Rr∩(X+Z+NRr(X))\mathcal R_r\cap(X+Z+N_{\mathcal R_r}(X))Rr​∩(X+Z+NRr​​(X)).

Significance

The result. Proposition 3.3 reduces the projective retraction on Rr\mathcal R_rRr​ to one truncated singular value decomposition. With Proposition 3.2 this gives an explicit, computable retraction for Riemannian optimization on fixed-rank matrices. It is used, for instance, in low-rank matrix completion algorithms. The point is local: Rr\mathcal R_rRr​ is not closed, so far from Rr\mathcal R_rRr​ the nearest matrix of rank exactly rrr need not exist, and the proposition gives an explicit radius on which it does exist and is unique. Proposition 4.11 gives a second retraction that needs only products of matrices and one r×rr\times rr×r inverse.

Formalizing it. All results here are proved, on paper. To the best of a search of Mathlib and the Prove2Me catalog, none is machine-checked. Mathlib has singular values of linear maps between finite-dimensional inner product spaces (LinearMap.singularValues), but no singular value decomposition in matrix form, no Weyl perturbation inequality for singular values, and no Eckart–Young theorem. A complete development would add these, and the Eckart–Young theorem with its uniqueness case is a standard result of numerical linear algebra in its own right.

Difficulty

The proof in the paper is short only because it cites three facts, and each of them is a real piece of matrix analysis.

  • Weyl's bound needs the variational (min–max) description of singular values, which Mathlib does not have for singular values.
  • Eckart–Young requires comparing ∥X−Y∥\|X-Y\|∥X−Y∥ with the singular values of XXX for every YYY of rank at most rrr, not only for those diagonal in the same bases. The obvious approach, writing YYY in the singular bases of XXX, fails because YYY need not be diagonal there.
  • Uniqueness under the gap requires showing that every minimizer is diagonal in some singular bases of XXX and then using the gap to fix its support. Without the gap uniqueness fails: for X=I2X=I_2X=I2​ and r=1r=1r=1 every uu⊤uu^\topuu⊤ with ∥u∥=1\|u\|=1∥u∥=1 is a nearest point.

A further subtlety: Proposition 3.3 must hold for any singular value decomposition of XXX. Singular vectors are not unique, so the proof has to show that the truncation does not depend on the choice under the gap (3.8).

Formalization scope

Matrices are Matrix (Fin n) (Fin m) ℝ with Mathlib's Frobenius norm (open scoped Matrix.Norms.Frobenius). The projection is the published platform predicate RandomGradFree.Nonsmooth.IsMetricProjection, and PRr(X)P_{\mathcal R_r}(X)PRr​​(X) is the set {Y | IsMetricProjection (rankSet r) X Y}. The set equality with a singleton states existence, uniqueness and the formula together.

Conventions committed to:

  • sv X i is σi(X)\sigma_i(X)σi​(X), 1-based as on the page. It is Mathlib's 0-based singularValues of Matrix.toEuclideanLin X at i - 1, so the index 000 is meaningless and every statement uses indices ≥1\ge1≥1.
  • IsSVD X U S V is the predicate of (3.5). The singular value decomposition is a hypothesis of the theorems, never a choice made inside them, so the theorems hold for every singular value decomposition.
  • truncSVD r U S V is ∑i≤rΣiiuivi⊤\sum_{i\le r}\Sigma_{ii}u_iv_i^\top∑i≤r​Σii​ui​vi⊤​, written with the diagonal of S. That these entries are the singular values σi(X)\sigma_i(X)σi​(X) is a fact to be proved, not part of the definition.
  • The hypothesis r≥1r\ge1r≥1 is added, because σr\sigma_rσr​ needs it (and R0={0}\mathcal R_0=\{0\}R0​={0}). It is the only hypothesis of Proposition 3.3 not printed on the page.
  • In Proposition 4.11, matrices use the block index types Fin r ⊕ Fin p and Fin r ⊕ Fin q. The tangent vector and the normal space are taken in the form the page gives, and invertibility of Σ0+A\Sigma_0+AΣ0​+A is an explicit hypothesis. In the paper's proof it comes from "ZZZ in a neighborhood of the origin".

A formalization in which the radius is replaced by a smaller one, the projection is taken onto the matrices of rank at most rrr, or the singular value decomposition is chosen inside the statement is a different theorem and is ruled out.

Wanted contributions, all reusable beyond this mission:

  • existence of a singular value decomposition in matrix form, and the identification of its diagonal with singularValues;
  • Weyl's inequality for singular values;
  • the Eckart–Young theorem and its uniqueness case;
  • the Schur-complement rank formula for 2×22\times22×2 block matrices, used for Proposition 4.11.

Selected references

  • P.-A. Absil and J. Malick, Projection-like retractions on matrix manifolds, SIAM J. Optim. 22(1):135–158, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1137/100802529 (authors' version HAL hal-00651608v2: https://hal.science/hal-00651608v2)
  • P.-A. Absil, R. Mahony and R. Sepulchre, Optimization Algorithms on Matrix Manifolds, Princeton University Press, 2008. https://press.princeton.edu/absil
  • C. Eckart and G. Young, The approximation of one matrix by another of lower rank, Psychometrika 1(3):211–218, 1936. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF02288367
  • R. A. Horn and C. R. Johnson, Matrix Analysis, Cambridge University Press, 1985 (§7.3, §7.4). https://doi.org/10.1017/CBO9780511810817
  • U. Helmke and J. B. Moore, Optimization and Dynamical Systems, Springer, 1994 (Ch. 5). https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4471-3467-1
8 thms1 active userReviewed
Operations ResearchOptimization·Captain: mikedeng1

Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions IX: Convergence of the r-Algorithm with Exact Directional MinimizationTextbook

Motivation

The r-algorithm of N. Z. Shor is a variable-metric method for minimizing functions that are not differentiable everywhere, such as maxima of smooth functions, penalty functions and Lagrangian dual functions of integer and decomposition problems. It combines a subgradient step with a space dilation along the difference of two successive almost-gradients, and the book reports it competitive with the best variable-metric and conjugate-gradient methods on "gully"-shaped test problems (Shor 1985, §3.6, pp. 68–77). Its convergence theory is limited. Section 3.7 of Shor's book gives a convergence proof only for an idealized version with exact directional minimization, on a class of piecewise smooth functions, and the book itself calls a weakening of the assumptions and rate estimates desirable (p. 85). This mission formalizes that section.

Timeline. Shor and Zhurbenko introduced the r-algorithm in 1971 (Kibernetika, no. 3, 51–59). Shor analysed the convergence of its exact-line-search version in 1975 (Kibernetika, no. 4, 48–53). Section 3.7 of the 1979 Russian monograph, translated in 1985, gives that analysis for piecewise smooth functions. The book states on p. 85 that weaker assumptions and rate estimates would be desirable.

Setting

Let EnE_nEn​ be nnn-dimensional Euclidean space with inner product (x,y)(x, y)(x,y), n≥1n \ge 1n≥1. For a unit vector ξ\xiξ and α>0\alpha > 0α>0 the operator of space dilation is Rα(ξ)x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ)ξR_\alpha(\xi)x = x + (\alpha - 1)(x, \xi)\xiRα​(ξ)x=x+(α−1)(x,ξ)ξ.

Widths. For a compact convex set WWW and a unit vector η\etaη, the width in direction η\etaη is dη(W)=max⁡x∈W(η,x)−min⁡x∈W(η,x)d_\eta(W) = \max_{x \in W}(\eta, x) - \min_{x \in W}(\eta, x)dη​(W)=maxx∈W​(η,x)−minx∈W​(η,x). The width is d(W)=min⁡∥η∥=1dη(W)d(W) = \min_{\|\eta\| = 1} d_\eta(W)d(W)=min∥η∥=1​dη​(W) and the diameter is D(W)=max⁡∥η∥=1dη(W)D(W) = \max_{\|\eta\| = 1} d_\eta(W)D(W)=max∥η∥=1​dη​(W). With eρ(W)=inf⁡z∈W∣(ρ,z)∣e_\rho(W) = \inf_{z \in W}|(\rho, z)|eρ​(W)=infz∈W​∣(ρ,z)∣ put Kρ(W)=dρ(W)/eρ(W)K_\rho(W) = d_\rho(W)/e_\rho(W)Kρ​(W)=dρ​(W)/eρ​(W) (or +∞+\infty+∞ when eρ(W)=0e_\rho(W) = 0eρ​(W)=0) and p(W)=inf⁡∥ρ∥=1Kρ(W)p(W) = \inf_{\|\rho\| = 1} K_\rho(W)p(W)=inf∥ρ∥=1​Kρ​(W).

The class KKK. EnE_nEn​ is partitioned into closed sets Dˉ1,…,Dˉm\bar D_1, \dots, \bar D_mDˉ1​,…,Dˉm​, each the closure of its interior, whose interiors are disjoint and homeomorphic to an open ball or open halfspace; fif_ifi​ is continuously differentiable on an open set containing Dˉi\bar D_iDˉi​; and f=fif = f_if=fi​ on Dˉi\bar D_iDˉi​. At a point xxx, the set of almost-gradients Gf(x)G_f(x)Gf​(x) is the set of gradients ∇fi(x)\nabla f_i(x)∇fi​(x) of the pieces with x∈Dˉix \in \bar D_ix∈Dˉi​. For δ,ε>0\delta, \varepsilon > 0δ,ε>0, Pˉδ,ε(x)\bar P_{\delta,\varepsilon}(x)Pˉδ,ε​(x) is the closed convex hull of all Gf(y)G_f(y)Gf​(y), ∥y−x∥<δ\|y - x\| < \delta∥y−x∥<δ, together with the ε\varepsilonε-balls around the elements of Gf(x)G_f(x)Gf​(x).

The r(α)r(\alpha)r(α)-algorithm. Fix α>1\alpha > 1α>1, β=1/α\beta = 1/\alphaβ=1/α. Start from x0x_0x0​, g~0=0\tilde g_0 = 0g~​0​=0 and a nonsingular B0B_0B0​. At iteration k+1k + 1k+1 choose gf(xk)∈Gf(xk)g_f(x_k) \in G_f(x_k)gf​(xk​)∈Gf​(xk​) with (Bk∗gf(xk),g~k)≤0(B_k^* g_f(x_k), \tilde g_k) \le 0(Bk∗​gf​(xk​),g~​k​)≤0; set gk∗=Bk∗gf(xk)g_k^* = B_k^* g_f(x_k)gk∗​=Bk∗​gf​(xk​), rk=gk∗−g~kr_k = g_k^* - \tilde g_krk​=gk∗​−g~​k​, ξk+1=rk/∥rk∥\xi_{k+1} = r_k/\|r_k\|ξk+1​=rk​/∥rk​∥, Bk+1=BkRβ(ξk+1)B_{k+1} = B_k R_\beta(\xi_{k+1})Bk+1​=Bk​Rβ​(ξk+1​), g~k+1=Rβ(ξk+1)gk∗\tilde g_{k+1} = R_\beta(\xi_{k+1}) g_k^*g~​k+1​=Rβ​(ξk+1​)gk∗​, and xk+1=xk−hk+1Bk+1g~k+1x_{k+1} = x_k - h_{k+1}B_{k+1}\tilde g_{k+1}xk+1​=xk​−hk+1​Bk+1​g~​k+1​ with hk+1≥0h_{k+1} \ge 0hk+1​≥0 such that fff does not increase along the step and some almost-gradient at xk+1x_{k+1}xk+1​ makes a non-acute angle with g~k+1\tilde g_{k+1}g~​k+1​ in the transformed metric. The standing assumption is f(x)→+∞f(x) \to +\inftyf(x)→+∞ as ∥x∥→∞\|x\| \to \infty∥x∥→∞ (3.50).

Formalization targets

Goal: convergence to an isolated local minimum (Theorem 3.13)

Assume (3.50) and ∥xk+1−xk∥→0\|x_{k+1} - x_k\| \to 0∥xk+1​−xk​∥→0 (3.52). If x∗x^*x∗ is an isolated local minimum, the component of {x:f(x∗)≤f(x)≤f(x0)}\{x : f(x^*) \le f(x) \le f(x_0)\}{x:f(x∗)≤f(x)≤f(x0​)} containing x0x_0x0​ also contains x∗x^*x∗, and no other point zzz of that component has linearly dependent Gf(z)G_f(z)Gf​(z), then

lim⁡k→∞xk=x∗.\lim_{k \to \infty} x_k = x^* .k→∞lim​xk​=x∗.

Milestones

  • Lemma 3.2 (p. 80): for B=SOB = SOB=SO with minimum eigenvalue λ(B)\lambda(B)λ(B) of SSS, λ(B)d(W)≤d(BW)≤λ(B)D(W)\lambda(B)d(W) \le d(BW) \le \lambda(B)D(W)λ(B)d(W)≤d(BW)≤λ(B)D(W).
  • Lemma 3.3 (p. 80): for z1,z2∈Wz_1, z_2 \in Wz1​,z2​∈W, 0<β≤10 < \beta \le 10<β≤1 and γ=∥z1−z2∥/d(W)≥1\gamma = \|z_1 - z_2\|/d(W) \ge 1γ=∥z1​−z2​∥/d(W)≥1,
d(Rβ(z1−z2∥z1−z2∥)W)≥d(W)1+(1−β2)/(β2γ2).d\Big(R_\beta\big(\tfrac{z_1 - z_2}{\|z_1 - z_2\|}\big)W\Big) \ge \frac{d(W)}{\sqrt{1 + (1-\beta^2)/(\beta^2\gamma^2)}} .d(Rβ​(∥z1​−z2​∥z1​−z2​​)W)≥1+(1−β2)/(β2γ2)​d(W)​.
  • Theorem 3.11 (p. 82): for every βn<v<1\sqrt[n]{\beta} < v < 1nβ​<v<1, ε,δ>0\varepsilon, \delta > 0ε,δ>0 and r≥1r \ge 1r≥1 there is kˉ>r\bar k > rkˉ>r with
p(Pˉδ,ε(xkˉ))≥v2α2n−1α2−1.p\big(\bar P_{\delta,\varepsilon}(x_{\bar k})\big) \ge \sqrt{\frac{v^2\sqrt[n]{\alpha^2} - 1}{\alpha^2 - 1}} .p(Pˉδ,ε​(xkˉ​))≥α2−1v2nα2​−1​​.
  • Theorem 3.12 (p. 84): the level set {f=f∞}\{f = f_\infty\}{f=f∞​}, f∞=lim⁡kf(xk)f_\infty = \lim_k f(x_k)f∞​=limk​f(xk​), contains a point x∗x^*x∗ with Gf(x∗)G_f(x^*)Gf​(x∗) linearly dependent.

Significance

Theorem 3.13 is the only convergence theorem the book gives for the r-algorithm. Theorems 3.11 and 3.12 hold for any function of the class KKK, convex or not, and say that iterates of the exact version cannot stall at a point where the local almost-gradients are linearly independent: linear dependence of Gf(x)G_f(x)Gf​(x) is a generalized stationarity condition that includes 0∈conv⁡Gf(x)0 \in \operatorname{conv} G_f(x)0∈convGf​(x). Lemmas 3.2 and 3.3 are statements about widths of convex bodies under linear maps and single dilations, and apply to any analysis of space-dilation methods, including the ellipsoid method.

All four results and the goal are proved in the book, the goal as a corollary without a written proof. None of them is formalized. The formalization adds a machine-checked definition of the class KKK and of the algorithm as a relation on sequences covering every admissible choice of almost-gradients and stepsizes, a verified proof of the book's argument, and a check of the corollary step, which the book leaves to the reader.

Difficulty

The obvious argument for descent methods is that the function value drops by a fixed amount at every step unless the gradient is small. That argument fails here. The r-algorithm can make null steps, with xk+1=xkx_{k+1} = x_kxk+1​=xk​ while BkB_kBk​ and g~k\tilde g_kg~​k​ change, and its steps are measured in a metric that degenerates as the dilations accumulate (det⁡Bk=βkdet⁡B0\det B_k = \beta^k \det B_0detBk​=βkdetB0​). A small step does not certify near-stationarity, and a large accumulated dilation does not certify progress.

The difficulty is to relate the geometry of the transformed almost-gradient sets Bk∗Pˉδ,ε(xk)B_k^*\bar P_{\delta,\varepsilon}(x_k)Bk∗​Pˉδ,ε​(xk​) to the decay forced on BkB_kBk​. This needs width estimates for convex bodies under linear maps and single dilations, which Mathlib does not have. Theorem 3.12 also needs a uniform lower bound, near a compact level set, on the Gram determinants of the piece gradients, and the book's proof of it is only sketched. Theorem 3.13 is stated as a corollary with no proof at all. Deriving it requires showing that the iterates cannot leave the prescribed component of {f(x∗)≤f≤f(x0)}\{f(x^*) \le f \le f(x_0)\}{f(x∗)≤f≤f(x0​)}, and that their accumulation points reduce to x∗x^*x∗.

Formalization scope

  • EnE_nEn​ is EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin n) with n≥1n \ge 1n≥1; operators are continuous linear maps; Bk∗B_k^*Bk∗​ is the adjoint. KρK_\rhoKρ​ and ppp are valued in [0,+∞][0, +\infty][0,+∞], so Kρ(W)=+∞K_\rho(W) = +\inftyKρ​(W)=+∞ is represented exactly. Widths are sInf/sSup of support values, equal to the book's minima and maxima on nonempty compact sets.
  • A function of class KKK is given with its representation (pieces, open domains, smooth fif_ifi​), and Gf(x)G_f(x)Gf​(x) is the set of gradients of the incident pieces, as on p. 79. Linear dependence of Gf(x)G_f(x)Gf​(x) is the negation of linear independence of that set.
  • A run of the algorithm is a predicate on sequences xk,g~k,Bk,gf(xk),hk+1x_k, \tilde g_k, B_k, g_f(x_k), h_{k+1}xk​,g~​k​,Bk​,gf​(xk​),hk+1​; every theorem holds for every run. Step (3) divides by ∥rk∥\|r_k\|∥rk​∥, so rk≠0r_k \ne 0rk​=0 is part of the run: a run that reaches a point where no admissible choice gives rk≠0r_k \ne 0rk​=0 has no continuation, as in the book. The stepsize hk+1=argmin⁡h_{k+1} = \operatorname{argmin}hk+1​=argmin is one admissible choice, not the definition.
  • The standing assumption (3.50) is a hypothesis of Theorem 3.11 as well as of 3.12 and 3.13, because the book imposes it for the rest of the section on p. 79.
  • In Lemma 3.3, β>0\beta > 0β>0 is added (the bound divides by β2\beta^2β2). "Body" means nonempty interior. An isolated local minimum is a local minimum with a neighbourhood containing no other local minimum.
  • Runs exist, so the hypotheses are not vacuous. For f(t)=∣t1∣+2∣t2∣f(t) = |t_1| + 2|t_2|f(t)=∣t1​∣+2∣t2​∣ (four quadrant pieces), started at the minimizer x0=0x_0 = 0x0​=0 with null steps, one can choose gf(xk+1)=−gf(xk)g_f(x_{k+1}) = -g_f(x_k)gf​(xk+1​)=−gf​(xk​) at every step, and 0∉Gf0 \notin G_f0∈/Gf​ keeps rk≠0r_k \neq 0rk​=0. A formalization under which no infinite run exists would make every theorem vacuous. The run predicate also forbids the degenerate reading hk+1<0h_{k+1} < 0hk+1​<0, under which the monotonicity condition (a) would hold vacuously on an empty segment.
  • Needed infrastructure: widths of compact convex sets under linear maps (via the singular values of BBB), the effect of a rank-one dilation on widths, determinant bounds for products of dilations, and Gram-determinant continuity. The first three apply to any space-dilation method and are welcome as independent lemmas.

Selected references

  • N. Z. Shor, Minimization Methods for Non-Differentiable Functions, Springer Series in Computational Mathematics 3, Springer 1985, §3.7, pp. 77–85. doi:10.1007/978-3-642-82118-9
  • N. Z. Shor, N. G. Zhurbenko, A minimization method using the operation of space dilation in the direction of the difference of two successive gradients, Kibernetika (Kiev), no. 3, 51–59, 1971 (listed in the bibliography of Shor 1985; no online copy known).
  • N. Z. Shor, The analysis of convergence of a gradient type method with space dilation in the direction of the difference of two successive gradients, Kibernetika (Kiev), no. 4, 48–53, 1975 (listed in the bibliography of Shor 1985; no online copy known).
7 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Euler Approximations with Varying Coefficients III: Uniform Lq-Convergence with Order 1/2Research Paper

Motivation

Stochastic differential equations whose coefficients grow faster than linearly (for instance stochastic volatility models such as the 3/2-model) cannot be simulated with the classical explicit Euler–Maruyama scheme: Hutzenthaler, Jentzen and Kloeden showed that its moments diverge when the drift or diffusion grows superlinearly (Proc. R. Soc. A, 2011). Implicit schemes avoid the divergence but require solving a nonlinear equation at every step. Tamed Euler schemes keep the scheme explicit and damp the coefficients by a factor depending on the step size.

  • 2012: Hutzenthaler, Jentzen and Kloeden introduce a tamed Euler scheme for SDEs with superlinearly growing drift (Ann. Appl. Probab. 22, 2012).
  • 2013: Sabanis extends the taming analysis for superlinearly growing drift (Electron. Commun. Probab. 18, no. 10, 2013, MR3070913).
  • 2015: Hutzenthaler and Jentzen survey explicit schemes for non-globally Lipschitz coefficients (Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 236, no. 1112, 2015); for the 3/2-model their results give Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence without rate only for p<1/2p<1/2p<1/2, as Sabanis (2016, p. 2) notes.
  • 2016: Sabanis (Ann. Appl. Probab. 26(4), 2016, arXiv:1308.1796v4) treats schemes with varying coefficients bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​, covering superlinearly growing diffusion coefficients, and proves Lp\mathcal L^pLp convergence (Theorem 1), the Lp\mathcal L^pLp rate 1/2 (Theorem 2) and the uniform Lq\mathcal L^qLq rate 1/2 (Theorem 3). A motivating example is the ddd-dimensional analogue of the 3/2-model of stochastic volatility, dX=λX(μ−∣X∣) dt+ξ∣X∣3/2 dWdX=\lambda X(\mu-|X|)\,dt+\xi|X|^{3/2}\,dWdX=λX(μ−∣X∣)dt+ξ∣X∣3/2dW, used for pricing VIX options.

Theorem 3 is the target here; Theorems 1 and 2 are the targets of companion missions.

Setting

Fix a filtered probability space (Ω,{Ft}t≥0,F,P)(\Omega,\{\mathcal F_t\}_{t\ge0},\mathcal F,P)(Ω,{Ft​}t≥0​,F,P) satisfying the usual conditions, a d1d_1d1​-dimensional Wiener martingale WWW, a horizon T>0T>0T>0, and exponents p0,p1≥2p_0,p_1\ge2p0​,p1​≥2. For x∈Rdx\in\mathbb R^dx∈Rd, ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm; for a d×d1d\times d_1d×d1​ matrix AAA, ∣A∣|A|∣A∣ is the Hilbert–Schmidt norm; xyxyxy is the scalar product. The coefficients are Borel functions b:[0,∞)×Rd→Rdb:[0,\infty)\times\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^db:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd and σ:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd×d1\sigma:[0,\infty)\times\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^{d\times d_1}σ:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd×d1​, and the SDE is

dX(t)=b(t,X(t)) dt+σ(t,X(t)) dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)dX(t)=b(t,X(t))\,dt+\sigma(t,X(t))\,dW(t),\qquad t\in[0,T],\qquad(2.1)dX(t)=b(t,X(t))dt+σ(t,X(t))dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)

with an F0\mathcal F_0F0​-measurable initial value X(0)X(0)X(0). With κn(t)=⌊nt⌋/n\kappa_n(t)=\lfloor nt\rfloor/nκn​(t)=⌊nt⌋/n, the scheme (2.2) is

dXn(t)=bn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dt+σn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dW(t),Xn(0)=X(0),dX_n(t)=b_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dt+\sigma_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dW(t),\qquad X_n(0)=X(0),dXn​(t)=bn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dt+σn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dW(t),Xn​(0)=X(0),

and in this mission bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​ are the tamed coefficients of Model 2 with α=1/2\alpha=1/2α=1/2:

bn(t,x)=b(t,x)1+n−1/2∣x∣l,σn(t,x)=σ(t,x)1+n−1/2∣x∣l.b_n(t,x)=\frac{b(t,x)}{1+n^{-1/2}|x|^l},\qquad \sigma_n(t,x)=\frac{\sigma(t,x)}{1+n^{-1/2}|x|^l}.bn​(t,x)=1+n−1/2∣x∣lb(t,x)​,σn​(t,x)=1+n−1/2∣x∣lσ(t,x)​.

The conditions used are: A-2, local boundedness of bbb on balls; A-4, the coercivity bound 2xb(t,x)+(p0−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2)2xb(t,x)+(p_0-1)|\sigma(t,x)|^2\le K(1+|x|^2)2xb(t,x)+(p0​−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2); A-5, E∣X(0)∣p0<∞\mathbb E|X(0)|^{p_0}<\inftyE∣X(0)∣p0​<∞; and A-6, the global monotonicity

2(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤L∣x−y∣22(x-y)(b(t,x)-b(t,y))+(p_1-1)|\sigma(t,x)-\sigma(t,y)|^2\le L|x-y|^22(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1​−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤L∣x−y∣2

together with the polynomial Lipschitz bound ∣b(t,x)−b(t,y)∣≤L(1+∣x∣l+∣y∣l)∣x−y∣|b(t,x)-b(t,y)|\le L(1+|x|^l+|y|^l)|x-y|∣b(t,x)−b(t,y)∣≤L(1+∣x∣l+∣y∣l)∣x−y∣, with l,L>0l,L>0l,L>0. The p\mathfrak pp-condition asks l≤p0−24l\le\frac{p_0-2}{4}l≤4p0​−2​ and a moment exponent ppp with 0<p<p10<p<p_10<p<p1​ and p≤p02l+1p\le\frac{p_0}{2l+1}p≤2l+1p0​​.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3 (p. 6)

Under A-2, A-4–A-6 and the p\mathfrak pp-condition, for every 0<q<p0<q<p0<q<p there is CCC independent of nnn with

E[sup⁡0≤t≤T∣X(t)−Xn(t)∣q]≤Cn−q/2,n≥1.(2.14)\mathbb E\Big[\sup_{0\le t\le T}|X(t)-X_n(t)|^q\Big]\le Cn^{-q/2},\qquad n\ge1.\qquad(2.14)E[0≤t≤Tsup​∣X(t)−Xn​(t)∣q]≤Cn−q/2,n≥1.(2.14)

The supremum is inside the expectation, which distinguishes it from Theorem 2.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2 (p. 8): the moments of XXX and of XnX_nXn​ up to order p0p_0p0​ are bounded on [0,T][0,T][0,T] uniformly in nnn (for general coefficients bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​ under A-1–A-5, B-2, B-3).
  2. Lemma 5 (p. 19): the Gyöngy–Krylov maximal inequality. If nonnegative continuous adapted f,gf,gf,g satisfy E[fτ1{g0≤c}]≤E[gτ1{g0≤c}]\mathbb E[f_\tau\mathbb 1_{\{g_0\le c\}}]\le\mathbb E[g_\tau\mathbb 1_{\{g_0\le c\}}]E[fτ​1{g0​≤c}​]≤E[gτ​1{g0​≤c}​] for all c>0c>0c>0 and stopping times τ≤T\tau\le Tτ≤T, then
E[sup⁡t≤τftγ]≤2−γ1−γ E[sup⁡t≤τgtγ],γ∈(0,1).\mathbb E\Big[\sup_{t\le\tau}f_t^\gamma\Big]\le\frac{2-\gamma}{1-\gamma}\,\mathbb E\Big[\sup_{t\le\tau}g_t^\gamma\Big],\qquad\gamma\in(0,1).E[t≤τsup​ftγ​]≤1−γ2−γ​E[t≤τsup​gtγ​],γ∈(0,1).
  1. Lemma 4 (p. 16): sup⁡0≤t≤TE∣Xn(t)−Xn(κn(t))∣p≤Cn−p/2\sup_{0\le t\le T}\mathbb E|X_n(t)-X_n(\kappa_n(t))|^p\le Cn^{-p/2}sup0≤t≤T​E∣Xn​(t)−Xn​(κn​(t))∣p≤Cn−p/2.
  2. Lemma 3 (p. 15): the taming errors E∫0T∣b−bn∣p(s,Xn(κn(s))) ds\mathbb E\int_0^T|b-b_n|^p(s,X_n(\kappa_n(s)))\,dsE∫0T​∣b−bn​∣p(s,Xn​(κn​(s)))ds and the analogue for σ\sigmaσ are ≤Cn−αp\le Cn^{-\alpha p}≤Cn−αp.

Significance

Theorem 3 gives the optimal strong rate 1/2 for an explicit scheme, uniformly over the time interval, for SDEs whose diffusion coefficient may grow superlinearly. Uniform-in-time error bounds are what pathwise functionals need (running maxima, barrier options, hitting times), and via Borel–Cantelli they give the almost-sure rate of Corollary 1 in the paper. Lemma 5 is a general-purpose tool: a domination inequality of Lenglart type, used throughout stochastic analysis to pass from bounds at stopping times to bounds on running suprema.

The results are proved in the paper; to our knowledge none of them has been formalized. Formalizing them would produce the first machine-checked convergence rate of a numerical scheme for SDEs, and a Lean proof of a Lenglart-type inequality, which Mathlib does not currently contain.

Difficulty

The error X−XnX-X_nX−Xn​ is controlled by the monotonicity condition A-6, which is one-sided: it bounds 2(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))2(x-y)(b(t,x)-b(t,y))2(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y)) from above but gives no Lipschitz bound on bbb or σ\sigmaσ with a constant independent of ∣x∣,∣y∣|x|,|y|∣x∣,∣y∣. The first idea, estimating Esup⁡t∣X−Xn∣p\mathbb E\sup_t|X-X_n|^pEsupt​∣X−Xn​∣p directly by applying the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequality to the martingale part of the error equation, therefore does not close: it produces terms of the same order as the quantity being estimated, weighted by polynomial factors in ∣X∣|X|∣X∣ and ∣Xn∣|X_n|∣Xn​∣, and the argument that gives Theorem 2 controls E∣X(t)−Xn(t)∣p\mathbb E|X(t)-X_n(t)|^pE∣X(t)−Xn​(t)∣p only for fixed ttt. Passing from fixed times to the supremum is what forces the loss from ppp to q<pq<pq<p in Theorem 3, and it is where Lemma 5 enters. On the formal side, the Itô integral against Brownian motion, Itô's formula for functions of multidimensional Itô processes and the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequality are not in Mathlib.

Formalization scope

Processes are indexed by t∈[0,∞)t\in[0,\infty)t∈[0,∞) (ℝ≥0) with values in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); diffusion values live in EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d × Fin d₁), whose norm is the Hilbert–Schmidt norm. The stochastic integral is the Ethier–Kurtz platform relation EthierKurtz.HasBrownianItoIntegral, applied coordinatewise, with integrands cut off after TTT. Solutions are hypotheses: the theorems apply to any solution XXX of (2.1) and any family (Xn)n≥1(X_n)_{n\ge1}(Xn​)n≥1​ of solutions of (2.2) on one probability space with one WWW and one X(0)X(0)X(0); existence is not claimed. Processes are required to be adapted to the filtration augmented by null sets (weaker than a complete filtration), the filtration is right-continuous, and nothing is required after TTT. Expectations and suprema are computed in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so no statement holds through an integral defaulting to 000. Constants CCC depend on everything except nnn (and, in Theorem 3, may depend on qqq); only n≥1n\ge1n≥1 is used, and q>0q>0q>0, p>0p>0p>0 follow the paper's Lp\mathcal L^pLp convention.

Two hypotheses are added to the printed statements, both because the printed proofs need them:

  • p1>2p_1>2p1​>2 in Theorem 3. The proof applies Itô's formula for p≥2p\ge2p≥2; an admissible p<2p<2p<2 is handled through p′=2p'=2p′=2, which satisfies the p\mathfrak pp-condition exactly when p1>2p_1>2p1​>2.
  • B-3 in Lemma 4. The proof uses moment bounds uniform in nnn (Lemma 2), which need B-3. Model 2 satisfies B-3.

Lemma 2 drops the dependence clause C=C(p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p)C=C(p,T,K,\mathbb E|X(0)|^p)C=C(p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p) and asserts only finiteness. Lemma 5 assumes neither that ggg is nondecreasing nor anything beyond the printed hypotheses.

A trivializing formalization is ruled out: the supremum sits inside a Lebesgue integral in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so the goal cannot hold because of a junk value, and the hypotheses are satisfiable (zero coefficients, constant solutions), which a sorry-free check confirms.

Needed infrastructure: Itô's formula for multidimensional Itô processes, the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequality (for Lemma 4), Gronwall's inequality in integral form, and stopping-time localisation for continuous adapted processes. Contributions to any of these are welcome, and all are reusable far beyond this mission. Lemma 5 is independent of the SDE part and can be attacked first.

Selected references

  • S. Sabanis, Euler approximations with varying coefficients: the case of superlinearly growing diffusion coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 26(4), 2083–2105, 2016. https://doi.org/10.1214/15-AAP1140 — arXiv:1308.1796v4, https://arxiv.org/abs/1308.1796v4
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, P. E. Kloeden, Strong and weak divergence in finite time of Euler's method for stochastic differential equations with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Proc. R. Soc. A 467, 1563–1576, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.2010.0348
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, P. E. Kloeden, Strong convergence of an explicit numerical method for SDEs with nonglobally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 22(4), 1611–1641, 2012. https://doi.org/10.1214/11-AAP803
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, Numerical approximations of stochastic differential equations with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 236, no. 1112, 2015 (reference [5] of the paper).
  • S. Sabanis, A note on tamed Euler approximations, Electron. Commun. Probab. 18, no. 10, 2013. MR3070913
  • I. Gyöngy, N. V. Krylov, On the rate of convergence of splitting-up approximations for SPDEs, in Stochastic Inequalities and Applications, Progr. Probab. 56, 301–321, Birkhäuser, 2003 (cited by the paper for Lemma 5). MR2073438
  • N. V. Krylov, Introduction to the Theory of Diffusion Processes, Transl. Math. Monographs 142, AMS, 1995 (cited by the paper for Lemma 5). MR1311478
14 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Euler Approximations with Varying Coefficients II: Strong Order 1/2 in Lp for Superlinearly Growing Diffusion CoefficientsResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic differential equations with superlinearly growing coefficients appear throughout applied probability: population models with cubic damping, Langevin dynamics with polynomial potentials, and stochastic volatility models such as the 3/2-model used for pricing VIX options, whose diffusion coefficient grows like ∣x∣3/2|x|^{3/2}∣x∣3/2. For such equations the classical explicit Euler–Maruyama method fails: Hutzenthaler, Jentzen and Kloeden (2011) proved that its ppp-th moments diverge whenever a coefficient grows superlinearly, so it cannot converge in Lp\mathcal L^pLp. Implicit methods converge (Higham–Mao–Stuart 2002) but cost a nonlinear solve per step.

The tamed Euler schemes are the explicit response.

  • Hutzenthaler, Jentzen and Kloeden (2012) tamed a superlinear drift and proved strong order 1/21/21/2 for globally Lipschitz diffusion coefficients.
  • Sabanis (2013) gave a simpler proof for a family of tamed drifts.
  • Hutzenthaler and Jentzen (2015) treated superlinear diffusion coefficients, obtaining Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence without a rate and only for small ppp.
  • Sabanis (2016), the source of this mission, tames drift and diffusion together and proves the optimal strong rate 1/21/21/2 in Lp\mathcal L^pLp under a one-sided (monotonicity) condition and polynomial growth. For the 3/2-model with p1=3.5p_1=3.5p1​=3.5, p0=6p_0=6p0​=6 this gives L2\mathcal L^2L2-convergence with order 1/21/21/2, which earlier results did not cover (p. 2).

This mission is the second of three on the paper. Mission I formalizes Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence without a rate (Theorem 1), mission III the uniform-in-time rate (Theorem 3).

Setting

Fix a filtered probability space (Ω,{Ft}t≥0,F,P)(\Omega,\{\mathcal F_t\}_{t\ge0},\mathcal F,P)(Ω,{Ft​}t≥0​,F,P) with right-continuous filtration, a horizon T>0T>0T>0, dimensions d,d1d,d_1d,d1​, and a d1d_1d1​-dimensional Wiener martingale WWW: a standard Brownian motion adapted to {Ft}\{\mathcal F_t\}{Ft​} whose future increments are independent of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​. The coefficients are Borel maps b:[0,∞)×Rd→Rdb:[0,\infty)\times\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^db:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd and σ:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd×d1\sigma:[0,\infty)\times\mathbb R^d\to\mathbb R^{d\times d_1}σ:[0,∞)×Rd→Rd×d1​; ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm, ∣A∣|A|∣A∣ the Hilbert–Schmidt norm, xyxyxy the scalar product. The SDE is

dX(t)=b(t,X(t)) dt+σ(t,X(t)) dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)dX(t)=b(t,X(t))\,dt+\sigma(t,X(t))\,dW(t),\qquad t\in[0,T],\qquad(2.1)dX(t)=b(t,X(t))dt+σ(t,X(t))dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)

with an F0\mathcal F_0F0​-measurable initial value X(0)=ξX(0)=\xiX(0)=ξ. For n≥1n\ge1n≥1 let κn(t)=⌊nt⌋/n\kappa_n(t)=\lfloor nt\rfloor/nκn​(t)=⌊nt⌋/n and consider the scheme

dXn(t)=bn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dt+σn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dW(t),Xn(0)=ξ,(2.2)dX_n(t)=b_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dt+\sigma_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dW(t),\qquad X_n(0)=\xi,\qquad(2.2)dXn​(t)=bn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dt+σn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dW(t),Xn​(0)=ξ,(2.2)

whose coefficients are frozen at the last grid point, so that XnX_nXn​ is computable step by step. The tamed coefficients of Model 2 are

bn(t,x)=b(t,x)1+n−α∣x∣l,σn(t,x)=σ(t,x)1+n−α∣x∣l.(2.11)–(2.12)b_n(t,x)=\frac{b(t,x)}{1+n^{-\alpha}|x|^l},\qquad \sigma_n(t,x)=\frac{\sigma(t,x)}{1+n^{-\alpha}|x|^l}.\qquad(2.11)\text{–}(2.12)bn​(t,x)=1+n−α∣x∣lb(t,x)​,σn​(t,x)=1+n−α∣x∣lσ(t,x)​.(2.11)–(2.12)

The hypotheses, with constants p0,p1≥2p_0,p_1\ge2p0​,p1​≥2:

  • A-2: bbb is bounded on balls, uniformly in t∈[0,T]t\in[0,T]t∈[0,T].
  • A-4 (coercivity): 2xb(t,x)+(p0−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2)2xb(t,x)+(p_0-1)|\sigma(t,x)|^2\le K(1+|x|^2)2xb(t,x)+(p0​−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2).
  • A-5: E∣X(0)∣p0<∞\mathbb E|X(0)|^{p_0}<\inftyE∣X(0)∣p0​<∞.
  • A-6 (global monotonicity, polynomial growth): for positive lll and LLL, 2(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤L∣x−y∣22(x-y)(b(t,x)-b(t,y))+(p_1-1)|\sigma(t,x)-\sigma(t,y)|^2\le L|x-y|^22(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1​−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤L∣x−y∣2 and ∣b(t,x)−b(t,y)∣≤L(1+∣x∣l+∣y∣l)∣x−y∣|b(t,x)-b(t,y)|\le L(1+|x|^l+|y|^l)|x-y|∣b(t,x)−b(t,y)∣≤L(1+∣x∣l+∣y∣l)∣x−y∣.
  • The p\mathfrak pp-condition: the scheme uses (2.11)–(2.12) with α=1/2\alpha=1/2α=1/2, l≤p0−24l\le\frac{p_0-2}{4}l≤4p0​−2​, and 0<p<p10<p<p_10<p<p1​, p≤p02l+1p\le\frac{p_0}{2l+1}p≤2l+1p0​​.
  • B-2 and B-3 (for the milestones): ∣bn∣≤min⁡(Cnα(1+∣x∣),∣b∣)|b_n|\le\min(Cn^\alpha(1+|x|),|b|)∣bn​∣≤min(Cnα(1+∣x∣),∣b∣), ∣σn∣2≤min⁡(Cnα(1+∣x∣2),∣σ∣2)|\sigma_n|^2\le\min(Cn^\alpha(1+|x|^2),|\sigma|^2)∣σn​∣2≤min(Cnα(1+∣x∣2),∣σ∣2), and A-4 for bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​ with a constant uniform in nnn.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 2 (p. 6)

Under A-2, A-4–A-6, the p\mathfrak pp-condition and p1>2p_1>2p1​>2, there is a constant CCC independent of nnn with

sup⁡0≤t≤TE[∣X(t)−Xn(t)∣p]≤Cn−p/2(n≥1).(2.13)\sup_{0\le t\le T}\mathbb E\big[|X(t)-X_n(t)|^p\big]\le Cn^{-p/2}\qquad(n\ge1).\qquad(2.13)0≤t≤Tsup​E[∣X(t)−Xn​(t)∣p]≤Cn−p/2(n≥1).(2.13)

The constant is existential and may depend on all data except nnn.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 2 (p. 8): sup⁡tE∣X(t)∣p\sup_t\mathbb E|X(t)|^psupt​E∣X(t)∣p and sup⁡n≥1sup⁡tE∣Xn(t)∣p\sup_{n\ge1}\sup_t\mathbb E|X_n(t)|^psupn≥1​supt​E∣Xn​(t)∣p are finite for 0<p≤p00<p\le p_00<p≤p0​, under A-1–A-5, B-2, B-3.
  2. Lemma 3 (p. 15): for Model 2, E∫0T∣b(s,Xn(κn(s)))−bn(s,Xn(κn(s)))∣p ds≤Cn−αp\mathbb E\int_0^T|b(s,X_n(\kappa_n(s)))-b_n(s,X_n(\kappa_n(s)))|^p\,ds\le Cn^{-\alpha p}E∫0T​∣b(s,Xn​(κn​(s)))−bn​(s,Xn​(κn​(s)))∣pds≤Cn−αp, and the same for σ\sigmaσ.
  3. Lemma 4 (p. 16): sup⁡tE∣Xn(t)−Xn(κn(t))∣p≤Cn−p/2\sup_t\mathbb E|X_n(t)-X_n(\kappa_n(t))|^p\le Cn^{-p/2}supt​E∣Xn​(t)−Xn​(κn​(t))∣p≤Cn−p/2.

Significance

Theorem 2 shows that an explicit scheme costing one coefficient evaluation per step attains the same strong order as the classical Euler method under global Lipschitz conditions. It does so for drift and diffusion coefficients that grow polynomially, and for moment orders ppp that are small relative to p0p_0p0​ and p1p_1p1​. Strong Lp\mathcal L^pLp rates are what multilevel Monte Carlo needs: the variance of level corrections is controlled by the L2\mathcal L^2L2 rate. When lll could be taken to be 000 the statement specializes to the classical globally Lipschitz rate (Remark 6).

The result is proved on paper; it has no machine-checked proof. Stochastic integrals are not in Mathlib; this mission uses the Brownian Itô-integral relation published by the Ethier–Kurtz series on the platform. A formal proof would give the first verified strong convergence rate for any Euler-type scheme. Along the way it produces reusable moment bounds for tamed schemes and the LpL^pLp control of one-step increments.

Difficulty

The obvious argument applies Itô's formula to ∣X−Xn∣p|X-X_n|^p∣X−Xn​∣p and closes a Gronwall inequality. Two steps of it fail without taming. First, the error splits into the monotone part, handled by A-6, and cross terms such as ∣Xn(s)−Xn(κn(s))∣p|X_n(s)-X_n(\kappa_n(s))|^p∣Xn​(s)−Xn​(κn​(s))∣p multiplied by (1+∣Xn∣2l)p/2(1+|X_n|^{2l})^{p/2}(1+∣Xn​∣2l)p/2; they are controlled only through moments of XnX_nXn​ of order well above ppp that are uniform in nnn, which the untamed scheme lacks. Second, the taming itself introduces an error b−bnb-b_nb−bn​ that must be shown to be O(n−1/2)O(n^{-1/2})O(n−1/2) in Lp\mathcal L^pLp and not merely o(1)o(1)o(1). The exponents in the p\mathfrak pp-condition are exactly what the Hölder splittings of these two terms require.

Formalization scope

  • Processes. Solutions are hypotheses, not constructed: XXX solves (2.1) and each XnX_nXn​ solves (2.2), on one probability space, with one WWW and one ξ\xiξ, on [0,T][0,T][0,T] only. An Itô process is a measurable process adapted to the null-set completion of the filtration, with continuous paths on [0,T][0,T][0,T], and a.s. for all t≤Tt\le Tt≤T simultaneously X(t)=ξ+∫0tB ds+∫0tS dWX(t)=\xi+\int_0^t B\,ds+\int_0^t S\,dWX(t)=ξ+∫0t​Bds+∫0t​SdW. The stochastic integral is the platform relation EthierKurtz_HasBrownianItoIntegral, with the integrand cut off after TTT.
  • Expectations and suprema are computed in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] (lower Lebesgue integrals), so no junk value of a non-integrable Bochner integral or of an unbounded real supremum enters. Rates are stated as ≤Cn−p/2\le Cn^{-p/2}≤Cn−p/2 for every n≥1n\ge1n≥1, with CCC real and quantified after all data.
  • Added hypotheses, disclosed. Theorem 2 carries p1>2p_1>2p1​>2: the printed proof covers 2≤p<p12\le p<p_12≤p<p1​ and reduces p<2p<2p<2 to p=2p=2p=2, which the p\mathfrak pp-condition admits exactly when p1>2p_1>2p1​>2. Lemma 4 carries B-3, which its proof uses through Lemma 2. Lemma 2 drops the stated dependence of CCC on (p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p)(p,T,K,\mathbb E|X(0)|^p)(p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p) and keeps only its finiteness uniformly in nnn.
  • Ruling out trivialization. The hypotheses are satisfiable, e.g. by b=σ=0b=\sigma=0b=σ=0 with constant solutions and p0=6p_0=6p0​=6, p1=3p_1=3p1​=3, l=1l=1l=1, p=2p=2p=2. The rate is a bound for every n≥1n\ge1n≥1, not an eventual or o(1)o(1)o(1) statement. A proof that uses a constant depending on nnn, or treats only X≡XnX\equiv X_nX≡Xn​, does not prove the goal.
  • Infrastructure needed: Itô's formula for ∣x∣p|x|^p∣x∣p against the platform's Itô integral, the Burkholder–Davis–Gundy inequality (or its Lp\mathcal L^pLp moment form), the zero-expectation property of Itô integrals of square-integrable integrands, and Gronwall's lemma in integral form. These are reusable far beyond this mission, and contributions of any of them are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. Sabanis, Euler approximations with varying coefficients: the case of superlinearly growing diffusion coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 26(4), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1308.1796 (v4)
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, P. E. Kloeden, Strong and weak divergence in finite time of Euler's method for stochastic differential equations with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Proc. R. Soc. A 467, 2011. https://doi.org/10.1098/rspa.2010.0348
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, P. E. Kloeden, Strong convergence of an explicit numerical method for SDEs with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 22, 2012. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR2985171
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, Numerical approximations of stochastic differential equations with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 236(1112), 2015. https://doi.org/10.1090/memo/1112
  • S. Sabanis, A note on tamed Euler approximations, Electron. Commun. Probab. 18, 2013. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR3070913
  • D. J. Higham, X. Mao, A. M. Stuart, Strong convergence of Euler-type methods for nonlinear stochastic differential equations, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 40, 2002. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR1949404
13 thms1 active userReviewed
ProbabilityStochastic Systems·Captain: mikedeng1

Euler Approximations with Varying Coefficients I: Lp-Convergence of Explicit Euler Schemes under Local MonotonicityResearch Paper

Motivation

Stochastic differential equations (SDEs) whose coefficients grow faster than linearly appear throughout applied probability: population and epidemic models with cubic damping, Langevin dynamics with non-quadratic potentials, and stochastic volatility models such as the 3/2-model used for pricing VIX options (Goard–Mazur 2013). Their solutions are almost never available in closed form, so they are simulated, and the method of choice is the explicit Euler–Maruyama scheme, because it is cheap and easy to implement.

For superlinearly growing coefficients the classical explicit scheme fails: its moments can diverge even when those of the true solution are finite, so it does not converge in Lp\mathcal L^pLp. Implicit schemes repair this at a higher computational cost (Higham–Mao–Stuart 2002). A second repair is to keep the scheme explicit but modify ("tame") its coefficients by an amount that vanishes as the step size goes to zero.

Timeline.

  • 2002: Higham, Mao and Stuart prove strong convergence of implicit Euler-type methods under a one-sided Lipschitz condition (MR1949404).
  • 2012: Hutzenthaler, Jentzen and Kloeden introduce the tamed Euler scheme for superlinearly growing drift and globally Lipschitz diffusion (Ann. Appl. Probab. 22, MR2985171).
  • 2013: Sabanis gives a short proof of convergence of tamed schemes with rate, again for superlinear drift (Electron. Commun. Probab. 18, MR3070913); Gyöngy and Sabanis prove convergence in probability of Euler approximations under local monotonicity conditions (Appl. Math. Optim. 68, MR3131501).
  • 2015: Hutzenthaler and Jentzen obtain Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence of explicit schemes with superlinear diffusion coefficients, in the 3/2-model only for p<1/2p<1/2p<1/2 (Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 236, no. 1112).
  • 2016: Sabanis treats superlinearly growing drift and diffusion coefficients under a local monotonicity condition, with Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence for every p<p0p<p_0p<p0​ (Ann. Appl. Probab. 26, arXiv:1308.1796). This mission formalizes that Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence theorem.

Setting

Fix a filtered probability space (Ω,{Ft}t≥0,F,P)(\Omega,\{\mathcal F_t\}_{t\ge0},\mathcal F,P)(Ω,{Ft​}t≥0​,F,P) satisfying the usual conditions, a Wiener martingale WWW in Rd1\mathbb R^{d_1}Rd1​ (a standard Brownian motion adapted to Ft\mathcal F_tFt​ whose future increments are independent of Ft\mathcal F_tFt​), and a horizon T>0T>0T>0. For x∈Rdx\in\mathbb R^dx∈Rd, ∣x∣|x|∣x∣ is the Euclidean norm and xyxyxy the scalar product; for a d×d1d\times d_1d×d1​ matrix, ∣A∣|A|∣A∣ is the Hilbert–Schmidt norm.

The SDE is

dX(t)=b(t,X(t)) dt+σ(t,X(t)) dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)dX(t)=b(t,X(t))\,dt+\sigma(t,X(t))\,dW(t),\qquad t\in[0,T],\tag{2.1}dX(t)=b(t,X(t))dt+σ(t,X(t))dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.1)

with Borel coefficients b(t,x)∈Rdb(t,x)\in\mathbb R^db(t,x)∈Rd, σ(t,x)∈Rd×d1\sigma(t,x)\in\mathbb R^{d\times d_1}σ(t,x)∈Rd×d1​ and an F0\mathcal F_0F0​-measurable initial value X(0)X(0)X(0).

For n≥1n\ge1n≥1 let κn(t)=⌊nt⌋/n\kappa_n(t)=\lfloor nt\rfloor/nκn​(t)=⌊nt⌋/n, the last grid point of mesh 1/n1/n1/n before ttt. The scheme is

dXn(t)=bn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dt+σn(t,Xn(κn(t))) dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.2)dX_n(t)=b_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dt+\sigma_n(t,X_n(\kappa_n(t)))\,dW(t),\qquad t\in[0,T],\tag{2.2}dXn​(t)=bn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dt+σn​(t,Xn​(κn​(t)))dW(t),t∈[0,T],(2.2)

with the same initial value X(0)X(0)X(0) and Borel coefficient sequences bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​ ("varying coefficients"). Between grid points the coefficients are frozen at Xn(κn(t))X_n(\kappa_n(t))Xn​(κn​(t)), so the scheme is explicit.

The hypotheses, with p0,p1∈[2,∞)p_0,p_1\in[2,\infty)p0​,p1​∈[2,∞): A-1 continuity of bbb in xxx; A-2 local boundedness of bbb; A-3 local monotonicity 2(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤LR∣x−y∣22(x-y)(b(t,x)-b(t,y))+(p_1-1)|\sigma(t,x)-\sigma(t,y)|^2\le L_R|x-y|^22(x−y)(b(t,x)−b(t,y))+(p1​−1)∣σ(t,x)−σ(t,y)∣2≤LR​∣x−y∣2 on ∣x∣,∣y∣≤R|x|,|y|\le R∣x∣,∣y∣≤R; A-4 coercivity 2xb(t,x)+(p0−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2)2xb(t,x)+(p_0-1)|\sigma(t,x)|^2\le K(1+|x|^2)2xb(t,x)+(p0​−1)∣σ(t,x)∣2≤K(1+∣x∣2); A-5 E∣X(0)∣p0<∞\mathbb E|X(0)|^{p_0}<\inftyE∣X(0)∣p0​<∞. For the scheme: B-1 ∫0Tsup⁡∣x∣≤R[∣bn−b∣p0+∣σn−σ∣p0] dt→0\int_0^T\sup_{|x|\le R}[|b_n-b|^{p_0}+|\sigma_n-\sigma|^{p_0}]\,dt\to0∫0T​sup∣x∣≤R​[∣bn​−b∣p0​+∣σn​−σ∣p0​]dt→0 for every RRR; B-2 ∣bn∣≤min⁡(Cnα(1+∣x∣),∣b∣)|b_n|\le\min(Cn^\alpha(1+|x|),|b|)∣bn​∣≤min(Cnα(1+∣x∣),∣b∣) and ∣σn∣2≤min⁡(Cnα(1+∣x∣2),∣σ∣2)|\sigma_n|^2\le\min(Cn^\alpha(1+|x|^2),|\sigma|^2)∣σn​∣2≤min(Cnα(1+∣x∣2),∣σ∣2) for some α∈(0,1/2]\alpha\in(0,1/2]α∈(0,1/2]; B-3 the coercivity bound of A-4 for bn,σnb_n,\sigma_nbn​,σn​, uniformly in nnn.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 1 (p. 5)

Under A-1–A-5 and B-1–B-3 with α∈(0,1/2]\alpha\in(0,1/2]α∈(0,1/2], for every 0<p<p00<p<p_00<p<p0​,

lim⁡n→∞sup⁡0≤t≤TE[∣X(t)−Xn(t)∣p]=0.\lim_{n\to\infty}\sup_{0\le t\le T}\mathbb E\big[|X(t)-X_n(t)|^p\big]=0.n→∞lim​0≤t≤Tsup​E[∣X(t)−Xn​(t)∣p]=0.

No rate is claimed; the statement holds for every coefficient sequence satisfying B-1–B-3, not only for the paper's tamed Models 1 and 2.

Milestones

  • Lemma 1 (p. 7): under A-5, B-2, B-3, sup⁡n≥1sup⁡0≤u≤TE∣Xn(u)∣2<∞\sup_{n\ge1}\sup_{0\le u\le T}\mathbb E|X_n(u)|^2<\inftysupn≥1​sup0≤u≤T​E∣Xn​(u)∣2<∞.
  • Lemma 2 (p. 8): under A-1–A-5, B-2, B-3, for every p≤p0p\le p_0p≤p0​,
sup⁡0≤t≤TE∣X(t)∣p ∨ sup⁡n≥1sup⁡0≤t≤TE∣Xn(t)∣p<∞.\sup_{0\le t\le T}\mathbb E|X(t)|^p\ \vee\ \sup_{n\ge1}\sup_{0\le t\le T}\mathbb E|X_n(t)|^p<\infty.0≤t≤Tsup​E∣X(t)∣p ∨ n≥1sup​0≤t≤Tsup​E∣Xn​(t)∣p<∞.
  • Theorem 4 (p. 6): under A-1–A-4 and B-1, sup⁡0≤t≤T∣Xn(t)−X(t)∣→0\sup_{0\le t\le T}|X_n(t)-X(t)|\to0sup0≤t≤T​∣Xn​(t)−X(t)∣→0 in probability.

Significance

Theorem 1 gives Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence of a whole class of explicit schemes, with no global Lipschitz condition on either coefficient, for every ppp below the coercivity order p0p_0p0​. In the 3/2-model of the introduction (p1=3.5p_1=3.5p1​=3.5, p0=6p_0=6p0​=6), earlier explicit results gave Lp\mathcal L^pLp-convergence only for p<1/2p<1/2p<1/2 (Hutzenthaler–Jentzen 2015, §4.10.3); Theorem 1 gives it for all p<6p<6p<6. The theorem is also the qualitative base on which the paper's rate results (Theorems 2 and 3, separate missions of this series) are built, and it justifies Monte Carlo estimates of moments computed with such schemes.

The result is proved in the paper. It has, to our knowledge, no machine-checked proof anywhere; Mathlib has Brownian motion but no stochastic integral, and the Itô integral used here is the relational definition published by the Ethier–Kurtz series on this platform. A formal proof needs Itô's formula for ∣x∣p|x|^p∣x∣p, Gronwall's lemma for moment functions, the convergence in probability of Theorem 4 (which the paper cites from Gyöngy–Sabanis rather than proving), and a uniform-integrability argument. Each of these is reusable well beyond this paper.

Difficulty

The natural first idea, estimating E∣X(t)−Xn(t)∣p\mathbb E|X(t)-X_n(t)|^pE∣X(t)−Xn​(t)∣p directly by Itô's formula and Gronwall, fails: under only local monotonicity the difference of drifts cannot be bounded by ∣X−Xn∣|X-X_n|∣X−Xn​∣ with a constant uniform in the state, so the Gronwall constant blows up. The route through convergence in probability and uniform moment bounds is forced, and the hard step is Lemma 2: bounding E∣Xn(t)∣p0\mathbb E|X_n(t)|^{p_0}E∣Xn​(t)∣p0​ uniformly in nnn. The coefficients of the scheme may grow like nαn^\alphanα, and the frozen argument Xn(κn(s))X_n(\kappa_n(s))Xn​(κn​(s)) produces a correction term E∫∣Xn(s)∣p0−2(Xn(s)−Xn(κn(s)))bn ds\mathbb E\int|X_n(s)|^{p_0-2}(X_n(s)-X_n(\kappa_n(s)))b_n\,dsE∫∣Xn​(s)∣p0​−2(Xn​(s)−Xn​(κn​(s)))bn​ds whose control is exactly where the restriction α≤1/2\alpha\le1/2α≤1/2 enters. For fixed nnn finiteness of moments is easy (linear growth); uniformity in nnn is the content.

Formalization scope

States are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d); diffusion values are EuclideanSpace ℝ (Fin d × Fin d₁), whose norm is the Hilbert–Schmidt norm. Time is ℝ≥0; coefficients are uncurried maps on ℝ≥0 × ℝ^d, assumed Borel measurable. An Itô process on [0,T][0,T][0,T] is a measurable process, adapted to the filtration augmented by all PPP-null sets, with continuous paths on [0,T][0,T][0,T], satisfying the integral equation almost surely simultaneously for all t≤Tt\le Tt≤T; the stochastic integral is the platform relation EthierKurtz.HasBrownianItoIntegral, applied coordinatewise with the integrand cut off after TTT. Nothing is required of the processes after TTT, so no existence beyond the horizon is assumed. Right-continuity of the filtration is a hypothesis; completeness is replaced by adaptedness to the augmented filtration, which is weaker, so the formal theorems are at least as strong as the paper's.

The solutions XXX and (Xn)n≥1(X_n)_{n\ge1}(Xn​)n≥1​ are hypotheses, all on one probability space with one Wiener process and one initial value; the theorems do not construct them. Expectations are lower Lebesgue integrals in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞] and suprema over ttt are taken in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], so no statement can hold because an expectation or a supremum takes a default value. B-1's integrand, a supremum over an uncountable ball, is required to be a.e. measurable in ttt, as the paper's Lebesgue integral presupposes. The exponent in Theorem 1 and Lemma 2 is restricted to p>0p>0p>0, the paper's convention for Lp\mathcal L^pLp. The dependence clauses "C:=C(T,K,E∣X(0)∣2)C:=C(T,K,\mathbb E|X(0)|^2)C:=C(T,K,E∣X(0)∣2)" (Lemma 1) and "C:=C(p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p)C:=C(p,T,K,\mathbb E|X(0)|^p)C:=C(p,T,K,E∣X(0)∣p)" (Lemma 2) are not formalized: only finiteness, i.e. a bound independent of nnn, is stated, which is what the proofs establish. Theorem 4 is stated with exactly its printed hypotheses.

A trivializing formalization, in which the moment bounds or the limit hold because the expectation or the supremum defaults to 000, or because the hypotheses on the solutions cannot be met, is ruled out: all quantities live in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and a sorry-free check shows every hypothesis is satisfiable (zero coefficients, constant solutions).

Contributions welcome: Itô's formula for the platform's integral relation, Burkholder–Davis–Gundy or Doob inequalities for it, a Gronwall lemma for measurable moment functions, and the Gyöngy–Sabanis convergence-in-probability theorem.

Selected references

  • S. Sabanis, Euler approximations with varying coefficients: the case of superlinearly growing diffusion coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 26(4), 2016. https://arxiv.org/abs/1308.1796 (v4)
  • I. Gyöngy, S. Sabanis, A note on Euler approximations for stochastic differential equations with delay, Appl. Math. Optim. 68, 2013. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR3131501
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, P. E. Kloeden, Strong convergence of an explicit numerical method for SDEs with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Ann. Appl. Probab. 22, 2012. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR2985171
  • M. Hutzenthaler, A. Jentzen, Numerical approximations of stochastic differential equations with non-globally Lipschitz continuous coefficients, Mem. Amer. Math. Soc. 236(1112), 2015. https://doi.org/10.1090/memo/1112
  • S. Sabanis, A note on tamed Euler approximations, Electron. Commun. Probab. 18, 2013. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR3070913
  • D. J. Higham, X. Mao, A. M. Stuart, Strong convergence of Euler-type methods for nonlinear stochastic differential equations, SIAM J. Numer. Anal. 40, 2002. https://mathscinet.ams.org/mathscinet-getitem?mr=MR1949404
12 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Probability·Captain: shivm

Randomized Kaczmarz: Exponential Convergence in ExpectationResearch Paper

Problem

Solve a consistent system Ax=bAx=bAx=b, with A∈Cm×nA\in\mathbb{C}^{m\times n}A∈Cm×n of full rank and m≥n≥1m\ge n\ge 1m≥n≥1. Kaczmarz's method (1937) projects the current iterate onto the solution hyperplane of one equation at a time. The cyclic version converges, but its rate depends on the order of the rows and has no clean bound in terms of a condition number.

Strohmer and Vershynin (2009) pick row iii at random with probability ∥ai∥22/∥A∥F2\|a_i\|_2^2/\|A\|_F^2∥ai​∥22​/∥A∥F2​ and prove

E ∥xk−x∥22≤(1−κ(A)−2)k ∥x0−x∥22,κ(A)=∥A∥Fσmin⁡(A).\mathbb{E}\,\|x_k-x\|_2^2 \le \bigl(1-\kappa(A)^{-2}\bigr)^k\,\|x_0-x\|_2^2,\qquad \kappa(A)=\frac{\|A\|_F}{\sigma_{\min}(A)}.E∥xk​−x∥22​≤(1−κ(A)−2)k∥x0​−x∥22​,κ(A)=σmin​(A)∥A∥F​​.

The rate does not depend on the number of equations mmm.

Setting

  • Rows. ai∈Cna_i\in\mathbb{C}^nai​∈Cn is the conjugate of row iii, so equation iii reads ⟨ai,x⟩=bi\langle a_i,x\rangle=b_i⟨ai​,x⟩=bi​.
  • Condition number. σmin⁡(A)=inf⁡∥z∥2=1∥Az∥2\sigma_{\min}(A)=\inf_{\|z\|_2=1}\|Az\|_2σmin​(A)=inf∥z∥2​=1​∥Az∥2​ and κ(A)=∥A∥F/σmin⁡(A)\kappa(A)=\|A\|_F/\sigma_{\min}(A)κ(A)=∥A∥F​/σmin​(A) (Demmel). It satisfies n≤κ(A)≤n ∥A∥2/σmin⁡(A)\sqrt n\le\kappa(A)\le\sqrt n\,\|A\|_2/\sigma_{\min}(A)n​≤κ(A)≤n​∥A∥2​/σmin​(A).
  • Algorithm 1. From any x0x_0x0​, draw row rrr independently with probability pr=∥ar∥22/∥A∥F2p_r=\|a_r\|_2^2/\|A\|_F^2pr​=∥ar​∥22​/∥A∥F2​ and set
xk+1=xk+br−⟨ar,xk⟩∥ar∥22 ar.x_{k+1}=x_k+\frac{b_r-\langle a_r,x_k\rangle}{\|a_r\|_2^2}\,a_r .xk+1​=xk​+∥ar​∥22​br​−⟨ar​,xk​⟩​ar​.
  • Expectation. E∥xk−x∥22\mathbb{E}\|x_k-x\|_2^2E∥xk​−x∥22​ is a finite sum over the mkm^kmk possible row sequences.

Targets

  • Theorem 2 (goal): the bound above, for every x0x_0x0​ and kkk.
  • Theorem 3: some x0≠xx_0\ne xx0​=x has E∥xk−x∥22≥(1−2k/κ(A)2)∥x0−x∥22\mathbb{E}\|x_k-x\|_2^2\ge(1-2k/\kappa(A)^2)\|x_0-x\|_2^2E∥xk​−x∥22​≥(1−2k/κ(A)2)∥x0​−x∥22​ for all k≥1k\ge1k≥1, so κ(A)−2\kappa(A)^{-2}κ(A)−2 is sharp up to a constant. Caveat: the source's proof only reaches the unsquared bound E∥xk−x∥2≥…\mathbb{E}\|x_k-x\|_2\ge\dotsE∥xk​−x∥2​≥… and then cites Jensen, which goes the wrong way. Its estimates give the squared bound with 444 in place of 222. Both forms are milestones.
  • Sharpness (§3.2): Theorem 2 is an equality when κ(A)=n\kappa(A)=\sqrt nκ(A)=n​.
  • Iteration count (§2.1): k≥2log⁡ε/log⁡(1−κ(A)−2)k\ge 2\log\varepsilon/\log(1-\kappa(A)^{-2})k≥2logε/log(1−κ(A)−2) steps give E∥xk−x∥22≤ε2∥x0−x∥22\mathbb{E}\|x_k-x\|_2^2\le\varepsilon^2\|x_0-x\|_2^2E∥xk​−x∥22​≤ε2∥x0​−x∥22​.

Proof idea

A single projection can barely reduce the error, when the error is almost orthogonal to the chosen row. On average it always does. If Z=aj/∥aj∥2Z=a_j/\|a_j\|_2Z=aj​/∥aj​∥2​ is drawn with probability pjp_jpj​, then

E ∣⟨z,Z⟩∣2=∥Az∥22∥A∥F2≥κ(A)−2∥z∥22.\mathbb{E}\,|\langle z,Z\rangle|^2=\frac{\|Az\|_2^2}{\|A\|_F^2}\ge\kappa(A)^{-2}\|z\|_2^2 .E∣⟨z,Z⟩∣2=∥A∥F2​∥Az∥22​​≥κ(A)−2∥z∥22​.

Pythagoras for one projection then gives E∥xk+1−x∥22≤(1−κ(A)−2) ∥xk−x∥22\mathbb{E}\|x_{k+1}-x\|_2^2\le(1-\kappa(A)^{-2})\,\|x_k-x\|_2^2E∥xk+1​−x∥22​≤(1−κ(A)−2)∥xk​−x∥22​; induct on kkk.

Formalization

  • Vectors live in EuclideanSpace ℂ (Fin n) and matrices in Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℂ. Mathlib's inner product is conjugate-linear in its first argument, which is why aia_iai​ is a conjugated row.
  • Full rank is stated as injectivity of z↦Azz\mapsto Azz↦Az.
  • The expectation expErrSq is an explicit finite sum, so no measure theory is needed. The tower identity is a milestone.
  • A zero row makes the step the identity (Lean's division by zero) and has probability 000, so it is harmless.
  • Mathlib has no Kaczmarz iteration, scaled condition number or σmin⁡\sigma_{\min}σmin​ lower bound; the mission builds them.

History

  • 1937: Kaczmarz introduces the cyclic method and proves convergence, with no rate.
  • 1970: Gordon, Bender and Herman rediscover it as ART for tomography.
  • 2009: Strohmer and Vershynin give the first rate in terms of a condition number.
  • 2010 onward: extensions to noisy systems, block methods, SGD and sketch-and-project (Needell; Needell–Tropp; Needell–Srebro–Ward; Gower–Richtárik).

References

  • S. Kaczmarz, Angenäherte Auflösung von Systemen linearer Gleichungen, Bull. Int. Acad. Polon. Sci. Lett. A 35 (1937), 355–357.
  • T. Strohmer and R. Vershynin, A randomized Kaczmarz algorithm with exponential convergence, J. Fourier Anal. Appl. 15 (2009), 262–278. arXiv:math/0702226
  • J. Demmel, The probability that a numerical analysis problem is difficult, Math. Comp. 50 (1988), 449–480. DOI
  • D. Needell, Randomized Kaczmarz solver for noisy linear systems, BIT Numer. Math. 50 (2010), 395–403. arXiv:0902.0958
  • D. Needell, N. Srebro and R. Ward, Stochastic gradient descent, weighted sampling, and the randomized Kaczmarz algorithm, Math. Program. 155 (2016), 549–573. arXiv:1310.5715
  • R. M. Gower and P. Richtárik, Randomized iterative methods for linear systems, SIAM J. Matrix Anal. Appl. 36 (2015), 1660–1690. arXiv:1506.03296
12 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Number Theory·Captain: Yuxuan Xu

Research Notes on ζ(9): Constructions, Computations, and Open Problems(v0.1)Research Paper

Motivation

A standard way to prove that a real number α\alphaα is irrational is to produce integer linear forms b+aαb+a\alphab+aα that are nonzero but arbitrarily small: if α=p/q\alpha=p/qα=p/q were rational, then bq+apbq+apbq+ap would be a nonzero integer of absolute value below 111 once the form is smaller than 1/q1/q1/q. This is the shape of every hypergeometric construction of linear forms in odd zeta values — Rivoal's proof that infinitely many ζ(2n+1)\zeta(2n+1)ζ(2n+1) are irrational and Zudilin's proof that at least one of ζ(5),ζ(7),ζ(9),ζ(11)\zeta(5),\zeta(7),\zeta(9),\zeta(11)ζ(5),ζ(7),ζ(9),ζ(11) is irrational both produce such forms and read off irrationality (of at least one member of a finite set) from a determinant condition.

The same reduction is useful in the other direction: it isolates exactly what a construction has to supply — small forms — from the arithmetic that consumes them. This mission formalizes that abstract layer: the criteria that turn small integer forms into irrationality, together with the positivity and quadrature lemmas used to certify that a form is nonzero.

The material is distilled from a research note on ζ(9)\zeta(9)ζ(9) (Xu, 2026). That note does not prove the irrationality of ζ(9)\zeta(9)ζ(9), and nothing in this mission depends on whether it can be: every statement below is a statement about real numbers, integer linear forms, real polynomials, and finite sums, with ζ(9)\zeta(9)ζ(9) and every other specific constant removed.

Setting

All objects live over R\mathbb{R}R.

  • An integer linear form in xxx is a number b+a xb+a\,xb+ax with a,b∈Za,b\in\mathbb{Z}a,b∈Z; the pair (b,a)(b,a)(b,a) is its coefficient vector. Two forms are independent when their coefficient vectors have nonzero cross determinant, b1a2≠b2a1b_1a_2\neq b_2a_1b1​a2​=b2​a1​.
  • Irrational x is Mathlib's predicate: x∉Qx\notin\mathbb{Q}x∈/Q as a real number.
  • The moment-matching hypothesis for a linear functional LLL on real polynomials, a five-point node vector yyy and a weight vector www, is L(Xm)=∑jwj yj mL(X^m)=\sum_{j}w_j\,y_j^{\,m}L(Xm)=∑j​wj​yjm​ for every m≤4m\le 4m≤4. A functional satisfying it is exact on a polynomial ppp when L p=∑jwj p(yj)L\,p=\sum_j w_j\,p(y_j)Lp=∑j​wj​p(yj​).
  • A positive weight vector has wj>0w_j>0wj​>0 for all jjj; a node vector is injective when yyy is injective on Fin 5.
  • Polynomial.taylor u₀ p is the Taylor expansion of ppp about u0u_0u0​; its coefficients are nonnegative when (((taylor u₀ p).coeff i≥0).\mathrm{coeff}\ i\ge 0).coeff i≥0 for every iii.
  • Matrix.mulVec M v is the usual matrix–vector product over Fin 5; ∑′\sum'∑′ denotes tsum over a Summable family.

Formalization targets

Goal — the one-form criterion

$$ \bigl(\forall \varepsilon>0,\ \exists, b,a\in\mathbb{Z}:\ b+ax\neq 0\ \wedge\ |b+ax|<\varepsilon\bigr)\ \Longrightarrow\ \text{xxx irrational.}

The goal is the weakest non-vacuous statement in the family: it assumes one form at a time and no rate. ### Stronger — the two-form criterion

\bigl(\forall \varepsilon>0,\ \exists, b_1a_1b_2a_2\in\mathbb{Z}:\ b_1a_2\neq b_2a_1\ \wedge\ |b_1+a_1x|<\varepsilon\ \wedge\ |b_2+a_2x|<\varepsilon\bigr)\ \Longrightarrow\ \text{xxx irrational.} $$

Supporting targets

  1. Moment-matching quadrature — matching the five moments m≤4m\le 4m≤4 implies exactness on every polynomial of degree at most 444.
  2. Weighted average is interior — with positive weights summing to 111, a non-constant five-tuple has its weighted average strictly between its minimum and maximum.
  3. Mediant is interior — the ratio ∑wiai / ∑wibi\sum w_ia_i\,/\,\sum w_ib_i∑wi​ai​/∑wi​bi​ with w,b>0w,b>0w,b>0 lies strictly between the extreme values of aj/bja_j/b_jaj​/bj​.
  4. Positive matrices — an entrywise positive 5×55\times55×5 matrix sends every nonzero nonnegative vector to a strictly positive vector.
  5. Taylor-sign kernel sum — nonnegative Taylor coefficients at a lower bound of a sequence, positive summable weights, and one positive sample force a strictly positive weighted sum.
  6. Five-sample nonvanishing — under moment matching with positive weights and injective nodes, a nonzero polynomial of degree ≤4\le 4≤4 whose five sampled values share a sign has L p≠0L\,p\neq 0Lp=0.

Targets 1–6 correspond to the mission's milestones; the goal and the two-form criterion close the mission.

Significance

The results. The two criteria are the exact statements that a linear-form construction has to feed, and they are what turns "small forms exist" into irrationality without any analytic input. The supporting lemmas are the standard certificates used to show a form is nonzero — which is the other half of the argument, and the half that finite checks can actually settle.

Formalizing them. All eight statements are elementary and already have informal proofs; each also has a locally compiled Lean proof (lake env lean, exit 0, no sorry) against Lean 4.33.1 and Mathlib revision 0df444a3, held by the mission captain and published in the companion repository. What this mission adds is platform verification plus reusable infrastructure: the moment-matching quadrature lemma, the weighted-average and mediant inequalities, and the positivity lemmas are stated in a form that transfers to any setting where five-point data is certified by moments. Alternative proofs, generalizations to nnn-point quadrature, and sharper variants are welcome contributions.

Difficulty

The integrality step, not the estimate. In the one-form criterion the obvious move — take ε=1/∣q∣\varepsilon=1/|q|ε=1/∣q∣ — leaves the real inequality ∣b+ax∣<1/∣q∣|b+ax|<1/|q|∣b+ax∣<1/∣q∣, which says nothing until the form is rewritten as (bq+ap)/q(bq+ap)/q(bq+ap)/q with bq+ap∈Zbq+ap\in\mathbb{Z}bq+ap∈Z; only then does ∣ ⋅ ∣<1|\,\cdot\,|<1∣⋅∣<1 force vanishing and contradict nonzeroness. Writing that rewrite in Lean means carrying the cast from Z\mathbb{Z}Z through field_simp and back through exact_mod_cast, which is where naive attempts break.

Moment matching needs a degree bound, not interpolation. The quadrature lemma is not "five values determine a degree-444 polynomial": the hypothesis is about the functional LLL on the five monomials, and the proof must expand an arbitrary ppp in the monomial basis (as_sum_range_C_mul_X_pow' with natDegree < 5) and commute two finite sums.

Sign conditions are load-bearing. In target 6, the shared-sign hypothesis is what turns a vanishing weighted sum into vanishing samples; the root-counting step then needs injective nodes and positive weights. Dropping either silently makes the statement false, and both are easy to forget.

Formalization scope

Everything is over R\mathbb{R}R; no complex numbers appear. The quadrature statements are fixed at five nodes (Fin 5) and degree ≤4\le 4≤4, as in the source note; the functional LLL is a Polynomial ℝ →ₗ[ℝ] ℝ, not a measure. natDegree (not degree) is the degree notion. The infinite sum in target 5 is tsum with an explicit Summable hypothesis. Matrices are Matrix (Fin 5) (Fin 5) ℝ with mulVec; irrationality is Mathlib's Irrational.

Ruled out: a quadrature statement in which the weights are unconstrained by positivity but the conclusion is strengthened to a lower bound — target 1 assumes only moment matching, and any strengthening must add hypotheses rather than reinterpret the existing ones. A "criterion" whose hypothesis is vacuous for every real xxx is likewise out of scope: both criteria are satisfiable hypotheses, not vacuous ones.

Infrastructure needed: the polynomial expansion and evaluation lemmas (as_sum_range, eval_eq_sum_range'), Finset sum rearrangement, Matrix.mulVec, Summable.tsum_lt_tsum_of_nonneg, and irrational_iff_ne_rational. The quadrature lemma, the mediant inequality, and the positivity lemmas are reusable beyond this mission.

Selected references

  • Y. Xu, Research Notes on ζ(9): Constructions, Computations, and Open Problems, v0.1, Zenodo, 2026. https://doi.org/10.5281/zenodo.22951155
  • W. Zudilin, Arithmetic of linear forms involving odd zeta values, J. Théor. Nombres Bordeaux 16:1 (2004), 251–291. https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0206176
  • T. Rivoal, La fonction zêta de Riemann prend une infinité de valeurs irrationnelles aux entiers impairs, C. R. Acad. Sci. Paris Sér. I Math. 331 (2000), 267–270. https://arxiv.org/abs/math/0008051
8 thms1 active userReviewed
🏆Completed
Captain: Elsie66

The Power Method for Eigenvalue ComputationResearch Paper

Motivation

Finding the eigenvalues of a large matrix or linear operator by computing its characteristic polynomial is numerically unworkable: the roots of a degree-nnn polynomial are exponentially sensitive to small coefficient perturbations, and no closed-form root formula exists once n≥5n\ge5n≥5. The power method avoids the polynomial entirely. Introduced in essentially its modern form by Müntz (1913) and von Mises and Pollaczek-Geiringer (1929), and analyzed rigorously alongside its shifted and inverse variants throughout the mid-20th century (Wilkinson, The Algebraic Eigenvalue Problem, 1965), it remains, in the guise of one power iteration per step, the engine inside PageRank, spectral clustering, and the Lanczos/Arnoldi methods used to find eigenpairs of matrices too large to diagonalize directly.

Setting

Let EEE be a finite-dimensional inner product space over k∈{R,C}\mathbb{k}\in\{\mathbb{R},\mathbb{C}\}k∈{R,C}, with inner product ⟨⋅,⋅⟩\langle\cdot,\cdot\rangle⟨⋅,⋅⟩ and norm ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥, and let T:E→ET:E\to ET:E→E be a self-adjoint (symmetric) linear operator: ⟨Tx,y⟩=⟨x,Ty⟩\langle Tx,y\rangle=\langle x,Ty\rangle⟨Tx,y⟩=⟨x,Ty⟩ for all x,y∈Ex,y\in Ex,y∈E. The spectral theorem for finite-dimensional self-adjoint operators gives an orthonormal basis e0,…,en−1e_0,\dots,e_{n-1}e0​,…,en−1​ of EEE (n=dim⁡En=\dim En=dimE) consisting of eigenvectors of TTT, with real eigenvalues λ0,…,λn−1\lambda_0,\dots,\lambda_{n-1}λ0​,…,λn−1​ satisfying Tei=λieiTe_i=\lambda_ie_iTei​=λi​ei​.

Call λi0\lambda_{i_0}λi0​​ dominant if ∣λj∣<∣λi0∣|\lambda_j|<|\lambda_{i_0}|∣λj​∣<∣λi0​​∣ for every j≠i0j\neq i_0j=i0​ — it is then the unique eigenvalue of largest magnitude. Given a starting vector x0∈Ex_0\in Ex0​∈E with coordinates x0=∑icieix_0=\sum_ic_ie_ix0​=∑i​ci​ei​ in the eigenbasis, the power iterates are Tkx0T^kx_0Tkx0​ for k=0,1,2,…k=0,1,2,\dotsk=0,1,2,…, and the Rayleigh quotient of TTT at a nonzero vector xxx is

RT(x)=Re⁡⟨x,Tx⟩∥x∥2,R_T(x)=\frac{\operatorname{Re}\langle x,Tx\rangle}{\|x\|^2},RT​(x)=∥x∥2Re⟨x,Tx⟩​,

which recovers λi\lambda_iλi​ exactly when xxx is the eigenvector eie_iei​.

Formalization targets

Iterate expansion

Tkx0=∑i(ciλi k) eiT^kx_0=\sum_i\bigl(c_i\lambda_i^{\,k}\bigr)\,e_iTkx0​=i∑​(ci​λik​)ei​

Rewriting the kkk-th power iterate in the eigenbasis: applying TTT kkk times raises each coordinate's eigenvalue factor to the kkk-th power, since TTT acts diagonally on the eigenbasis. This is the algebraic core the rest of the argument rescales and takes limits of.

Rescaled convergence

λi0−k Tkx0  ⟶  ci0 ei0(k→∞)\lambda_{i_0}^{-k}\,T^kx_0\;\longrightarrow\;c_{i_0}\,e_{i_0}\quad(k\to\infty)λi0​−k​Tkx0​⟶ci0​​ei0​​(k→∞)

Given a dominant eigenvalue λi0≠0\lambda_{i_0}\neq0λi0​​=0 and ci0≠0c_{i_0}\neq0ci0​​=0, dividing the expansion above by λi0k\lambda_{i_0}^kλi0​k​ leaves the i0i_0i0​-th term fixed at ci0ei0c_{i_0}e_{i_0}ci0​​ei0​​ while every other term is multiplied by (λj/λi0)k→0(\lambda_j/\lambda_{i_0})^k\to0(λj​/λi0​​)k→0, since ∣λj/λi0∣<1|\lambda_j/\lambda_{i_0}|<1∣λj​/λi0​​∣<1 for j≠i0j\neq i_0j=i0​. This is the precise sense in which the power iterates "align" with the dominant eigenvector.

Goal — Rayleigh quotient convergence

RT(Tkx0)  ⟶  λi0(k→∞)R_T\bigl(T^kx_0\bigr)\;\longrightarrow\;\lambda_{i_0}\quad(k\to\infty)RT​(Tkx0​)⟶λi0​​(k→∞)

The practical output of the power method: the Rayleigh quotient of the (unrescaled) iterates converges to the dominant eigenvalue itself, giving a numerically computable estimator that needs no knowledge of λi0\lambda_{i_0}λi0​​ in advance. This is the weakest statement that captures "the power method converges to the dominant eigenvalue" without hard-coding a convergence rate, so it is the mission's goal.

Significance

The power method is the template every practical large-scale eigenvalue algorithm departs from: shifted inverse iteration, Rayleigh quotient iteration (with locally cubic convergence), the QR algorithm, and Krylov subspace methods (Lanczos, Arnoldi) all begin from the same diagonal-power argument formalized here, then add a trick — a shift, a change of subspace, an orthogonalization step — to accelerate or extend it. The result itself is classical and completely settled mathematically; there is no open question in the convergence theory of the basic power method under the dominant-eigenvalue hypothesis used here. What this mission contributes is a machine-checked version of that classical argument built directly on Mathlib's existing finite-dimensional spectral theorem (LinearMap.IsSymmetric.eigenvalues/eigenvectorBasis) — as of this writing, Mathlib's InnerProductSpace/Spectrum.lean and Rayleigh.lean files contain the spectral decomposition itself, and a Rayleigh quotient for ContinuousLinearMap, but not this convergence statement.

Difficulty

The obvious first attempt is to bound ∥Tkx0−λi0kci0ei0∥\|T^kx_0-\lambda_{i_0}^kc_{i_0}e_{i_0}\|∥Tkx0​−λi0​k​ci0​​ei0​​∥ by a naive sum of norms and take limits termwise; this works for the rescaled sequence (Milestone 2) but does not by itself give the Rayleigh-quotient limit, because RTR_TRT​ is invariant only under nonzero scalar rescaling, not under limits taken carelessly — one has to first establish that the limit vector ci0ei0c_{i_0}e_{i_0}ci0​​ei0​​ is nonzero (using ci0≠0c_{i_0}\neq0ci0​​=0), then invoke continuity of RTR_TRT​ away from 000 to transport the Tendsto from the rescaled sequence to RT(Tkx0)=RT(λi0−kTkx0)R_T(T^kx_0)=R_T(\lambda_{i_0}^{-k}T^kx_0)RT​(Tkx0​)=RT​(λi0​−k​Tkx0​). Getting the degenerate case n=1n=1n=1 right is the other trap: with only one eigenvalue, the dominance hypothesis is vacuous, and if that eigenvalue is allowed to be 000 the rescaling λi0−k\lambda_{i_0}^{-k}λi0​−k​ divides by zero and the rescaled-convergence statement becomes false — the formalization must therefore assume λi0≠0\lambda_{i_0}\neq0λi0​​=0 explicitly rather than deriving it from dominance alone.

Formalization scope

The mission works with a general RCLike 𝕜 field (real or complex EEE), a LinearMap.IsSymmetric operator on a FiniteDimensional inner product space, and Mathlib's own eigenvalues/ eigenvectorBasis (which already fixes the eigenbasis and a specific, decreasing-by-value ordering of eigenvalues — the formalization does not re-derive the spectral theorem). Dominance is stated by magnitude (|\lambda_j| < |\lambda_{i_0}|), not by position in Mathlib's ordering, since the dominant eigenvalue need not be the largest by value (it could be the most negative). The starting vector x0x_0x0​ is arbitrary subject to ci0≠0c_{i_0}\neq0ci0​​=0; no normalization (∥x0∥=1\|x_0\|=1∥x0​∥=1) is imposed, since the Rayleigh quotient and the rescaled limit are both scale-invariant/ scale-equivariant. A trivializing formalization is ruled out explicitly: without both λi0≠0\lambda_{i_0}\neq0λi0​​=0 and ci0≠0c_{i_0}\neq0ci0​​=0, the n=1n=1n=1, T=0T=0T=0 counterexample above makes the rescaled-convergence statement false, so these are load-bearing hypotheses, not decoration. Contributions on the two milestones (the algebraic iterate expansion, and the rescaled-limit argument) are especially welcome, since they are reusable building blocks for any future mission on shifted/inverse power iteration or Rayleigh quotient iteration.

Selected references

  • R. von Mises and H. Pollaczek-Geiringer, Praktische Verfahren der Gleichungsauflösung, ZAMM, 1929.
  • J. H. Wilkinson, The Algebraic Eigenvalue Problem, Oxford University Press, 1965.
  • L. N. Trefethen and D. Bau III, Numerical Linear Algebra, SIAM, 1997 (Lecture 27: the power method).
4 thms1 active userReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Interior Point Algorithms VI: Predictor Directions Are O(μ) on the Optimal PartitionTextbook

Why the tail of an interior-point method matters

Primal-dual interior-point methods for linear programming come with two kinds of guarantee. The worst-case one is a bound of O(nlog⁡(R/ϵ))O(\sqrt n\log(R/\epsilon))O(n​log(R/ϵ)) iterations to reduce the duality gap below ϵ\epsilonϵ. The asymptotic one says what happens to the duality gap near the end of the run, where practical codes spend their final iterations. For the predictor-corrector method of Mizuno, Todd and Ye (1993), Ye, Güler, Tapia and Zhang (1993) showed that the same algorithm that achieves the best known worst-case bound also drives the duality gap to zero quadratically. The proof needs neither nondegeneracy nor convergence of the iterates. Chapter 7 of Yinyu Ye's Interior Point Algorithms: Theory and Analysis (Wiley 1997, DOI 10.1002/9781118032701) gives a self-contained account. This mission formalizes its LP core.

Timeline, as attributed in the chapter's notes (§7.5): Zhang, Tapia and Dennis first obtained superlinear convergence of a primal-dual method assuming the iterates converge, and quadratic convergence assuming nondegeneracy. Quadratic convergence for general LP, with neither assumption, was first established by Ye, Güler, Tapia and Zhang, and independently by Mehrotra and by Tsuchiya. The monotone LCP version (§7.3) is due to Ye and Anstreicher, who also showed that the predictor step cannot converge superlinearly when no strictly complementary solution exists (Proposition 7.13). Monteiro and Wright extended that negative result to Newton-like methods in general.

Setting

Fix a real m×nm\times nm×n matrix AAA of rank mmm, b∈Rmb\in\mathbb R^mb∈Rm and c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn. Consider the standard-form pair

(LP) min⁡{cTx:Ax=b, x≥0},(LD) max⁡{bTy:ATy+s=c, s≥0}.(\mathrm{LP})\ \min\{c^Tx: Ax=b,\ x\ge0\},\qquad(\mathrm{LD})\ \max\{b^Ty: A^Ty+s=c,\ s\ge0\}.(LP) min{cTx:Ax=b, x≥0},(LD) max{bTy:ATy+s=c, s≥0}.

An interior point is a triple (x,y,s)(x,y,s)(x,y,s) with Ax=bAx=bAx=b, x>0x>0x>0, ATy+s=cA^Ty+s=cATy+s=c, s>0s>0s>0. Write X=diag⁡(x)X=\operatorname{diag}(x)X=diag(x), S=diag⁡(s)S=\operatorname{diag}(s)S=diag(s), eee for the all-ones vector and μ=xTs/n\mu=x^Ts/nμ=xTs/n. The neighbourhood of the central path is

N2(η)={(x,y,s) interior: ∥Xs−μe∥≤ημ}.\mathcal N_2(\eta)=\{(x,y,s)\text{ interior}:\ \|Xs-\mu e\|\le\eta\mu\}.N2​(η)={(x,y,s) interior: ∥Xs−μe∥≤ημ}.

The strict complementarity partition (P,Z)=(P∗,Z∗)(P,Z)=(P^*,Z^*)(P,Z)=(P∗,Z∗) collects the indices on which some optimal x∗x^*x∗ is positive (PPP) and those on which some optimal slack s∗s^*s∗ is positive (ZZZ). The predictor direction at (x,s)(x,s)(x,s) is the solution of

Xds+Sdx=−Xs,Adx=0,−ATdy−ds=0.(7.4)Xd_s+Sd_x=-Xs,\qquad Ad_x=0,\qquad -A^Td_y-d_s=0. \tag{7.4}Xds​+Sdx​=−Xs,Adx​=0,−ATdy​−ds​=0.(7.4)

It is the case γ=0\gamma=0γ=0 of the direction d(x,s,γ)d(x,s,\gamma)d(x,s,γ) defined by Sdx+Xds=γμe−XsSd_x+Xd_s=\gamma\mu e-XsSdx​+Xds​=γμe−Xs, Adx=0Ad_x=0Adx​=0, −ATdy−ds=0-A^Td_y-d_s=0−ATdy​−ds​=0. The scaling is D=X1/2S−1/2D=X^{1/2}S^{-1/2}D=X1/2S−1/2, and ∥vS∥\|v_S\|∥vS​∥ denotes the Euclidean norm of the subvector of vvv indexed by SSS. Algorithm 4.5 (predictor-corrector, η=1/4\eta=1/4η=1/4) starts in N2(1/4)\mathcal N_2(1/4)N2​(1/4). At each iteration it takes the largest step θk\theta^kθk along d(xk,sk,0)d(x^k,s^k,0)d(xk,sk,0) that keeps the iterate in N2(1/2)\mathcal N_2(1/2)N2​(1/2), then a full step along d(⋅,⋅,1)d(\cdot,\cdot,1)d(⋅,⋅,1) back towards the central path.

The order of convergence of a sequence rk→0r^k\to0rk→0 (Definition 1.1) is the supremum of the p≥0p\ge0p≥0 with lim sup⁡k∣rk+1∣/∣rk∣p<∞\limsup_k|r^{k+1}|/|r^k|^p<\inftylimsupk​∣rk+1∣/∣rk∣p<∞. Quadratic convergence (Definition 1.2) means lim sup⁡k∣rk+1∣/∣rk∣2<∞\limsup_k|r^{k+1}|/|r^k|^2<\inftylimsupk​∣rk+1∣/∣rk∣2<∞.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.5

For every μ0>0\mu^0>0μ0>0 there is a constant C>0C>0C>0, depending only on (A,b,c)(A,b,c)(A,b,c) and μ0\mu^0μ0, such that at every (x,y,s)∈N2(1/4)(x,y,s)\in\mathcal N_2(1/4)(x,y,s)∈N2​(1/4) with μ≤μ0\mu\le\mu^0μ≤μ0 the predictor direction satisfies

∥(dx)P∥≤Cμand∥(ds)Z∥≤Cμ.\|(d_x)_P\|\le C\mu\qquad\text{and}\qquad\|(d_s)_Z\|\le C\mu .∥(dx​)P​∥≤Cμand∥(ds​)Z​∥≤Cμ.

Milestones

  • Lemma 7.2. If Xds+Sdx=−XsXd_s+Sd_x=-XsXds​+Sdx​=−Xs and dxTds≥0d_x^Td_s\ge0dxT​ds​≥0, then ∥D−1dx∥2+∥Dds∥2≤xTs\|D^{-1}d_x\|^2+\|Dd_s\|^2\le x^Ts∥D−1dx​∥2+∥Dds​∥2≤xTs.
  • Relation (7.6). There is ξ∈(0,1)\xi\in(0,1)ξ∈(0,1), independent of the point, with ξ≤xj≤1/ξ\xi\le x_j\le1/\xiξ≤xj​≤1/ξ on PPP and ξ≤sj≤1/ξ\xi\le s_j\le1/\xiξ≤sj​≤1/ξ on ZZZ throughout N2(1/4)∩{μ≤μ0}\mathcal N_2(1/4)\cap\{\mu\le\mu^0\}N2​(1/4)∩{μ≤μ0}.
  • Lemma 7.3. ∥(dx)Z∥≤Cμ\|(d_x)_Z\|\le C\mu∥(dx​)Z​∥≤Cμ and ∥(ds)P∥≤Cμ\|(d_s)_P\|\le C\mu∥(ds​)P​∥≤Cμ, with CCC uniform as in the goal.
  • Lemma 7.4. (dx)P(d_x)_P(dx​)P​ is the unique minimizer of 12∥DP−1u∥2\tfrac12\|D_P^{-1}u\|^221​∥DP−1​u∥2 subject to APu=−AZ(dx)ZA_Pu=-A_Z(d_x)_ZAP​u=−AZ​(dx​)Z​. dyd_ydy​ minimizes 12∥DZAZTv∥2\tfrac12\|D_ZA_Z^Tv\|^221​∥DZ​AZT​v∥2 subject to APTv=−(ds)PA_P^Tv=-(d_s)_PAPT​v=−(ds​)P​, and every minimizer gives (ds)Z=−AZTv(d_s)_Z=-A_Z^Tv(ds​)Z​=−AZT​v.
  • Proposition 7.1. For positive rk→0r^k\to0rk→0, the order of convergence equals lim inf⁡klog⁡rk+1/log⁡rk\liminf_k\log r^{k+1}/\log r^kliminfk​logrk+1/logrk.
  • Theorem 7.6. For Algorithm 4.5: (i) (xk)Tsk≤ϵ(x^k)^Ts^k\le\epsilon(xk)Tsk≤ϵ once k≥1+1+42n2log⁡(x0)Ts0ϵk\ge\frac{1+\sqrt{1+4\sqrt2n}}{2}\log\frac{(x^0)^Ts^0}{\epsilon}k≥21+1+42​n​​logϵ(x0)Ts0​; (ii) 1−θk≤C(xk)Tsk1-\theta^k\le C(x^k)^Ts^k1−θk≤C(xk)Tsk; (iii) (xk)Tsk→0(x^k)^Ts^k\to0(xk)Tsk→0 quadratically.
  • Lemmas 7.9 and 7.10 (monotone LCP linear algebra). For M=(MPPMPZMZPMZZ)M=\begin{pmatrix}M_{PP}&M_{PZ}\\M_{ZP}&M_{ZZ}\end{pmatrix}M=(MPP​MZP​​MPZ​MZZ​​) with vTMv≥0v^TMv\ge0vTMv≥0: MPPxP=0  ⟺  MPPTxP=0M_{PP}x_P=0\iff M_{PP}^Tx_P=0MPP​xP​=0⟺MPPT​xP​=0, which implies (MZP+MPZT)xP=0(M_{ZP}+M_{PZ}^T)x_P=0(MZP​+MPZT​)xP​=0; and R(MPPMPZ0I)=R(MPPTMZPT0−I)\mathcal R\begin{pmatrix}M_{PP}&M_{PZ}\\0&I\end{pmatrix}=\mathcal R\begin{pmatrix}M_{PP}^T&M_{ZP}^T\\0&-I\end{pmatrix}R(MPP​0​MPZ​I​)=R(MPPT​0​MZPT​−I​).

The goal fixes no value of CCC: it asserts only that one constant serves every point, which is the content the later results use.

Significance

Theorem 7.5, together with Lemma 7.3, says the whole predictor direction is O(μ)O(\mu)O(μ). Through the step-size bound of Lemma 4.17 this gives 1−θk=O(μk)1-\theta^k=O(\mu^k)1−θk=O(μk) and hence μk+1=O((μk)2)\mu^{k+1}=O((\mu^k)^2)μk+1=O((μk)2): quadratic convergence of the duality gap (Theorem 7.6). The same least-squares structure yields the LCP version (Theorem 7.12) and the variants of §7.4. Bounds of this kind on the directions near the optimal face also underlie finite termination and basis identification schemes.

On the formal side, no machine-checked development of interior-point asymptotics is known to the authors of this mission. Mathlib has the linear algebra (ranges, block matrices, least squares through orthogonal projection) but no linear-programming duality theory beyond what other missions supply. A formal proof would supply the Goldman–Tucker partition, the uniform bounds (7.6) and a Hoffman-type bound for least-squares solutions in reusable form.

Difficulty

Everything rests on a constant being uniform. For a single interior point, any bound ∥(dx)P∥≤Cμ\|(d_x)_P\|\le C\mu∥(dx​)P​∥≤Cμ holds with some CCC depending on the point, so the content is entirely in choosing CCC before the point. The natural first attempt bounds the direction through ∥D∥\|D\|∥D∥ and ∥D−1∥\|D^{-1}\|∥D−1∥ on all indices, and this fails: on PPP the entries Dj2=xj/sjD_j^2=x_j/s_jDj2​=xj​/sj​ grow like 1/μ1/\mu1/μ, and on ZZZ they shrink like μ\muμ. Only the split along the optimal partition, with the least-squares characterization of the "large" components and the uniform bounds (7.6), balances the two. Relation (7.6) itself requires the partition to be strict (Goldman–Tucker) and an a priori bound on the iterates. For Theorem 7.6 the algorithm's step-size rule has to be carried as defined: a largest step over an interval of neighbourhood memberships.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ and matrices Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ. All norms are Euclidean. P∗P^*P∗ and Z∗Z^*Z∗ are defined as unions of supports of optimal solutions; that they partition the indices is a consequence solvers must prove, not an assumption. The standing assumption rank⁡A=m\operatorname{rank}A=mrankA=m appears as a hypothesis.

Instantiations of the book's O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅) (p. 213: "may depend on nnn and/or the original problem data, but … independent of the iteration kkk"):

  • Theorem 7.5, Lemma 7.3: ∃C>0\exists C>0∃C>0 quantified before the point; CCC depends on (A,b,c)(A,b,c)(A,b,c) and on a bound μ0\mu^0μ0 for μ\muμ.
  • Relation (7.6): ∃ξ∈(0,1)\exists\xi\in(0,1)∃ξ∈(0,1) quantified before the point, depending on (A,b,c)(A,b,c)(A,b,c) and μ0\mu^0μ0. The book states it for the iterates; here it covers every point of N2(1/4)\mathcal N_2(1/4)N2​(1/4) with μ≤μ0\mu\le\mu^0μ≤μ0.
  • Theorem 7.6(i): the constant of Theorem 4.18's proof, threshold 1+1+42n2log⁡((x0)Ts0/ϵ)\frac{1+\sqrt{1+4\sqrt2n}}{2}\log((x^0)^Ts^0/\epsilon)21+1+42​n​​log((x0)Ts0/ϵ), with R=(x0)Ts0R=(x^0)^Ts^0R=(x0)Ts0. (ii): ∃C>0\exists C>0∃C>0 before kkk. (iii): Definition 1.2.

A constant chosen after the point would make the goal trivially true; the statements quantify ∃C\exists C∃C first to rule this out. Algorithm 4.5 is run for every kkk (no termination test), and its step is the greatest admissible θ\thetaθ, not a supremum. The order of convergence and all limits superior take values in EReal, so infinite values are not collapsed to junk reals. Lemma 7.4's second problem is stated as corrected (the printed objective 12∥DZv∥2\tfrac12\|D_Zv\|^221​∥DZ​v∥2 is ill-typed and the sign of (ds)Z=AZTv(d_s)_Z=A_Z^Tv(ds​)Z​=AZT​v is inconsistent with (7.4)); see the findings.

Beyond the paper. One strengthened variant: Theorem 7.5 on N2(η)\mathcal N_2(\eta)N2​(η) for every η∈(0,1)\eta\in(0,1)η∈(0,1) and without the rank condition. The book's proof uses the neighbourhood only through (1−η)μ≤xjsj≤(1+η)μ(1-\eta)\mu\le x_js_j\le(1+\eta)\mu(1−η)μ≤xj​sj​≤(1+η)μ, and the rank of AAA enters nowhere.

Needed infrastructure: LP duality and strict complementarity (Goldman–Tucker), a Hoffman-type bound for minimum-norm solutions, and weighted least squares. The definitions of the neighbourhood, the direction d(x,s,γ)d(x,s,\gamma)d(x,s,γ) and Algorithm 4.5 are shared with the chapter 4 analysis and are reusable for other interior-point results. Contributions proving any milestone independently are welcome.

Selected references

  • Y. Ye, Interior Point Algorithms: Theory and Analysis, Wiley-Interscience, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1002/9781118032701
  • S. Mizuno, M. J. Todd, Y. Ye, On adaptive-step primal-dual interior-point algorithms for linear programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 18 (1993) 964–981. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.18.4.964
  • Y. Ye, O. Güler, R. A. Tapia, Y. Zhang, A quadratically convergent O(nL)O(\sqrt n L)O(n​L)-iteration algorithm for linear programming, Mathematical Programming 59 (1993) 151–162. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01582144
  • A. J. Goldman, A. W. Tucker, Theory of linear programming, in Linear Inequalities and Related Systems, Annals of Mathematics Studies 38, Princeton, 1956. https://doi.org/10.1515/9781400881987-005
  • A. J. Hoffman, On approximate solutions of systems of linear inequalities, Journal of Research of the National Bureau of Standards 49 (1952) 263–265. https://doi.org/10.6028/jres.049.027
11 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Interior Point Algorithms II: Proximity Measures and Newton Steps for the Analytic CenterTextbook

Motivation

Interior-point methods for linear programming do not move along the boundary of the feasible region; they follow a curve of points that stay "central". The basic notion of centrality is the analytic center of a polytope, the interior point that maximizes the product of the slacks of its defining inequalities (Sonnevend, 1986, doi:10.1007/BFb0043914). Every path-following and potential-reduction algorithm repeatedly computes an approximate analytic center, so it matters how "approximately centered" is measured and what one Newton step does to that measure.

Chapter 3 of Yinyu Ye's Interior Point Algorithms: Theory and Analysis (Wiley, 1997, doi:10.1002/9781118032701) answers both questions for a polytope given by linear inequalities. It introduces three measures of proximity to the analytic center (dual, primal and primal-dual), proves that they are equivalent, and shows that the corresponding Newton steps square them. The same estimates reappear, with minor changes, in the complexity analysis of Karmarkar's algorithm and of the primal-dual potential-reduction methods of the later chapters. This mission formalizes those statements.

Setting

Let AAA be a real m×nm\times nm×n matrix and c∈Rnc\in\mathbb R^nc∈Rn. Vector inequalities are componentwise, eee is the all-ones vector, X=diag⁡(x)X=\operatorname{diag}(x)X=diag(x), S=diag⁡(s)S=\operatorname{diag}(s)S=diag(s), and ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is the Euclidean norm. The chapter works under standing assumptions: AAA has rank mmm, n>mn>mn>m, and the polytope

Ω={y∈Rm: s=c−ATy≥0}\Omega=\{y\in\mathbb R^m:\ s=c-A^Ty\ge 0\}Ω={y∈Rm: s=c−ATy≥0}

is bounded with nonempty interior. An interior point (y,s)(y,s)(y,s) of Ω\OmegaΩ has s=c−ATy>0s=c-A^Ty>0s=c−ATy>0. The homogeneous primal set is XΩ={x:Ax=0, x≥0}\mathcal X_\Omega=\{x: Ax=0,\ x\ge 0\}XΩ​={x:Ax=0, x≥0}; its interior points have Ax=0Ax=0Ax=0, x>0x>0x>0.

Three potential functions are used:

B(y)=∑jlog⁡sj,P(x)=nlog⁡(cTx)−∑jlog⁡xj,ψn(x,s)=nlog⁡(xTs)−∑jlog⁡(xjsj).\mathcal B(y)=\sum_j\log s_j,\qquad \mathcal P(x)=n\log(c^Tx)-\sum_j\log x_j,\qquad \psi_n(x,s)=n\log(x^Ts)-\sum_j\log(x_js_j).B(y)=j∑​logsj​,P(x)=nlog(cTx)−j∑​logxj​,ψn​(x,s)=nlog(xTs)−j∑​log(xj​sj​).

The analytic center (ya,sa)(y^a,s^a)(ya,sa) is the interior point of Ω\OmegaΩ maximizing B\mathcal BB, and the primal potential minimizer xax^axa is the interior point of XΩ\mathcal X_\OmegaXΩ​ with cTxa=nc^Tx^a=ncTxa=n minimizing P\mathcal PP.

The three proximity measures are

ηd(s)=∥S−1AT(AS−2AT)−1AS−1e∥,ηp(x)=∥(I−XAT(AX2AT)−1AX)(Xc−e)∥,η(x,s)=∥Xs−e∥.\eta_d(s)=\|S^{-1}A^T(AS^{-2}A^T)^{-1}AS^{-1}e\|,\qquad \eta_p(x)=\|(I-XA^T(AX^2A^T)^{-1}AX)(Xc-e)\|,\qquad \eta(x,s)=\|Xs-e\|.ηd​(s)=∥S−1AT(AS−2AT)−1AS−1e∥,ηp​(x)=∥(I−XAT(AX2AT)−1AX)(Xc−e)∥,η(x,s)=∥Xs−e∥.

The dual Newton step is s+=s+AT(AS−2AT)−1AS−1es^+=s+A^T(AS^{-2}A^T)^{-1}AS^{-1}es+=s+AT(AS−2AT)−1AS−1e; the primal Newton step is x+=x−X(I−XAT(AX2AT)−1AX)(Xc−e)x^+=x-X(I-XA^T(AX^2A^T)^{-1}AX)(Xc-e)x+=x−X(I−XAT(AX2AT)−1AX)(Xc−e); the primal-dual Newton directions (dx,dy,ds)(d_x,d_y,d_s)(dx​,dy​,ds​) solve Sdx+Xds=e−XsSd_x+Xd_s=e-XsSdx​+Xds​=e−Xs, Adx=0Ad_x=0Adx​=0, −ATdy−ds=0-A^Td_y-d_s=0−ATdy​−ds​=0, and are taken with step size θ=αmin⁡(Xs)/∥(XS)−1/2(e−Xs)∥\theta=\alpha\sqrt{\min(Xs)}/\|(XS)^{-1/2}(e-Xs)\|θ=αmin(Xs)​/∥(XS)−1/2(e−Xs)∥ for a constant 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 3.2

For an interior point (y,s)(y,s)(y,s) of Ω\OmegaΩ, an interior point xxx of XΩ\mathcal X_\OmegaXΩ​, the analytic center (ya,sa)(y^a,s^a)(ya,sa) and the primal minimizer xax^axa:

  1. ηd(s)≤η(x,s)\eta_d(s)\le\eta(x,s)ηd​(s)≤η(x,s) and ηp(x)≤η(x,s)\eta_p(x)\le\eta(x,s)ηp​(x)≤η(x,s); if ηd(s)<1\eta_d(s)<1ηd​(s)<1 some interior x′x'x′ has η(x′,s)≤ηd(s)\eta(x',s)\le\eta_d(s)η(x′,s)≤ηd​(s), and if ηp(x)<1\eta_p(x)<1ηp​(x)<1 some interior (y′,s′)(y',s')(y′,s′) has η(x,s′)≤ηp(x)\eta(x,s')\le\eta_p(x)η(x,s′)≤ηp​(x).
  2. If η(x,s)<1\eta(x,s)<1η(x,s)<1, some x^≥0\hat x\ge0x^≥0 with Ax^=0A\hat x=0Ax^=0, cTx^=sTx^=nc^T\hat x=s^T\hat x=ncTx^=sTx^=n has η(x^,s)≤η(x,s)/1−η(x,s)2/n\eta(\hat x,s)\le\eta(x,s)/\sqrt{1-\eta(x,s)^2/n}η(x^,s)≤η(x,s)/1−η(x,s)2/n​.
  3. If η(x,s)<1\eta(x,s)<1η(x,s)<1 and cTx=nc^Tx=ncTx=n,
ψn(x,s)−ψn(xa,sa),P(x)−P(xa),B(ya)−B(y) ≤ η(x,s)22(1−η(x,s)).\psi_n(x,s)-\psi_n(x^a,s^a),\quad \mathcal P(x)-\mathcal P(x^a),\quad \mathcal B(y^a)-\mathcal B(y)\ \le\ \frac{\eta(x,s)^2}{2(1-\eta(x,s))}.ψn​(x,s)−ψn​(xa,sa),P(x)−P(xa),B(ya)−B(y) ≤ 2(1−η(x,s))η(x,s)2​.
  1. If η(x,s)<1\eta(x,s)<1η(x,s)<1,
∥S−1sa−e∥≤η(x,s)1−η(x,s),∥X−1xa−e∥≤η(x,s)1−η(x,s).\|S^{-1}s^a-e\|\le\frac{\eta(x,s)}{1-\eta(x,s)},\qquad \|X^{-1}x^a-e\|\le\frac{\eta(x,s)}{1-\eta(x,s)}.∥S−1sa−e∥≤1−η(x,s)η(x,s)​,∥X−1xa−e∥≤1−η(x,s)η(x,s)​.

Milestones

  • Lemma 3.1: for ∥d∥∞<1\|d\|_\infty<1∥d∥∞​<1, eTd≥∑ilog⁡(1+di)≥eTd−∥d∥2/(2(1−∥d∥∞))e^Td\ge\sum_i\log(1+d_i)\ge e^Td-\|d\|^2/(2(1-\|d\|_\infty))eTd≥∑i​log(1+di​)≥eTd−∥d∥2/(2(1−∥d∥∞​)).
  • Theorem 3.2 (i): part 1 of the goal on its own.
  • Theorem 3.3: if ηd(s)<1\eta_d(s)<1ηd​(s)<1, then s+>0s^+>0s+>0 and ηd(s+)≤ηd(s)2\eta_d(s^+)\le\eta_d(s)^2ηd​(s+)≤ηd​(s)2.
  • Corollary 3.8: if ηp(x)<1\eta_p(x)<1ηp​(x)<1, then x+>0x^+>0x+>0, Ax+=0Ax^+=0Ax+=0 and ηp(x+)≤ηp(x)2\eta_p(x^+)\le\eta_p(x)^2ηp​(x+)≤ηp​(x)2.
  • Lemma 3.12: under sTx=ns^Tx=nsTx=n, ψn(x+θdx,s+θds)−ψn(x,s)≤−αmin⁡(Xs)∥(XS)−1/2(e−Xs)∥+α2/(2(1−α))\psi_n(x+\theta d_x,s+\theta d_s)-\psi_n(x,s)\le-\alpha\sqrt{\min(Xs)}\|(XS)^{-1/2}(e-Xs)\|+\alpha^2/(2(1-\alpha))ψn​(x+θdx​,s+θds​)−ψn​(x,s)≤−αmin(Xs)​∥(XS)−1/2(e−Xs)∥+α2/(2(1−α)).
  • Theorem 3.13: for each 0<η<10<\eta<10<η<1 there are 0<α<10<\alpha<10<α<1 and δ>0\delta>0δ>0 such that η(x,s)≥η\eta(x,s)\ge\etaη(x,s)≥η and sTx=ns^Tx=nsTx=n imply ψn(x+θdx,s+θds)−ψn(x,s)≤−δ\psi_n(x+\theta d_x,s+\theta d_s)-\psi_n(x,s)\le-\deltaψn​(x+θdx​,s+θds​)−ψn​(x,s)≤−δ, uniformly over all instances.

Significance

Theorem 3.2 is what makes an "approximate analytic center" a well-defined notion: whichever of the three measures an algorithm controls, the other two and the potential gaps follow. Parts 3 and 4 convert a small residual ∥Xs−e∥\|Xs-e\|∥Xs−e∥ into a bound on the logarithmic-volume gap and on the relative distance to the true center. These are the quantities used to start the Newton procedures of Theorem 3.3 and Corollary 3.8, and to bound the number of central-section and potential-reduction steps elsewhere in the book. Lemma 3.12 and Theorem 3.13 are the per-step estimate of the primal-dual potential-reduction method, the template for the linear-programming algorithms of Chapter 4.

None of these statements is formalized on Prove2Me. The platform has self-concordant Newton analysis (ConvexOptimization.newton_quadratic_phase_contraction) and proximity measures for self-scaled cones (SelfScaledIPM.FuncProx.*, open), but neither works with Ye's measures or steps. The results are classical and proved in the book. Formalizing them yields a reusable linear-algebraic layer (projections I−XAT(AX2AT)−1AXI-XA^T(AX^2A^T)^{-1}AXI−XAT(AX2AT)−1AX, scaled least squares, the primal-dual Newton system) for any later interior-point mission. It also checks hypotheses the book leaves implicit: Lemma 3.12 is false without the normalization sTx=ns^Tx=nsTx=n that §3.4.2 states only once.

Difficulty

Most of the chapter's arguments are short on paper but depend on facts that are only described in words. In (i), ηd(s)\eta_d(s)ηd​(s) and ηp(x)\eta_p(x)ηp​(x) are the optimal values of weighted least-squares problems, and the domination needs that variational characterization, which goes through the invertibility of AS−2ATAS^{-2}A^TAS−2AT and AX2ATAX^2A^TAX2AT (rank mmm). Part 4 is not a one-step estimate: it is obtained by running the Newton procedures of Theorem 3.3 and Corollary 3.8 indefinitely, summing a geometric series of quadratically shrinking corrections, and identifying the limit with the analytic center. That identification requires uniqueness of the center (strict concavity on a bounded polytope) and the correspondence between sas^asa and xax^axa through Xasa=eX^as^a=eXasa=e. Part 3 needs that correspondence as well. The positivity of the damped iterates in Lemma 3.12, which the book asserts "can be verified", has to be established before any logarithm is evaluated. Theorem 3.13 requires constants independent of nnn, which rules out every argument that loses a dimension factor.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ and matrices Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ; indices are 000-based. The Euclidean norm is written out as norm2, since Mathlib's norm on Fin n → ℝ is the sup norm. Matrix inverses are Mathlib's ⁻¹, which is 000 on singular matrices. The rank hypothesis makes every inverted matrix positive definite at the points where the theorems use it, so the junk value is never reached. The standing assumptions (rank A=mA=mA=m, n>mn>mn>m, Ω\OmegaΩ bounded with nonempty interior) are bundled as StandingAssumptions A c and are a hypothesis of every theorem. The normalization sTx=ns^Tx=nsTx=n of §3.4.2 is a hypothesis of Lemma 3.12 and Theorem 3.13. The analytic center and the primal minimizer are defined by their extremal properties, not by the optimality system Xs=eXs=eXs=e, so the goal cannot be obtained by unfolding a definition. The theorems are stated for the steps exactly as the book defines them, never for an arbitrary "good" step.

Explicit constants: no result in this mission uses O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅). Theorem 3.13's constants are existential in the book ("we can choose α\alphaα … for a positive constant δ\deltaδ"). They are stated as ∀η∈(0,1) ∃α∈(0,1) ∃δ>0\forall\eta\in(0,1)\ \exists\alpha\in(0,1)\ \exists\delta>0∀η∈(0,1) ∃α∈(0,1) ∃δ>0 quantified before nnn, AAA, ccc and (x,s)(x,s)(x,s), which is what the proof establishes. A formalization in which α\alphaα or δ\deltaδ depends on the instance would be trivial and is ruled out by this quantifier order.

Beyond the paper. One variant is posed: a sharpness probe of Lemma 3.12 with the normalization sTx=ns^Tx=nsTx=n removed (findings F1, F3). With A=(1,−1)A=(1,-1)A=(1,−1), c=(1,1)c=(1,1)c=(1,1), s=(1,1)s=(1,1)s=(1,1), x=(10,10)x=(10,10)x=(10,10), α=1/2\alpha=1/2α=1/2 the step only rescales xxx, so the potential is unchanged while the claimed bound is about −6.11-6.11−6.11. A disproof is the expected outcome.

Not in scope: Theorem 3.11 (the primal-dual Newton step), whose positivity claim fails as printed (finding F2); the iteration-count theorems 3.4, 3.7, 3.9, stated with O(⋅)O(\cdot)O(⋅); the central-section Lemmas 3.5–3.6; and Theorem 3.10 (affine scaling). Contributions welcome: the least-squares characterization of ηd\eta_dηd​, ηp\eta_pηp​ as reusable lemmas, and the uniqueness of the analytic center.

Selected references

  • Y. Ye, Interior Point Algorithms: Theory and Analysis, Wiley-Interscience, 1997, Chapter 3. doi:10.1002/9781118032701
  • G. Sonnevend, An "analytical centre" for polyhedrons and new classes of global algorithms for linear (smooth, convex) programming, Lecture Notes in Control and Information Sciences 84, Springer, 1986, pp. 866–875. doi:10.1007/BFb0043914
  • N. Karmarkar, A new polynomial-time algorithm for linear programming, Combinatorica 4 (1984) 373–395. doi:10.1007/BF02579150
  • M. J. Todd and Y. Ye, A centered projective algorithm for linear programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 15 (1990) 508–529. doi:10.1287/moor.15.3.508
8 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Primal-Dual Interior-Point Methods V: Below a Threshold μ̄ the Projection Step Returns a Strictly Complementary SolutionTextbook

Why exact solutions from interior-point iterates matter

Primal-dual interior-point methods for linear programming generate strictly positive iterates that approach the solution set but never reach it: the duality measure μ\muμ tends to zero, yet no iterate is ever an exact solution. Many applications need more than an approximate point — an exact optimal basis, a vertex, or the optimal partition of the variables into those that are positive and those that vanish at optimality. Chapter 7 of Stephen J. Wright's Primal-Dual Interior-Point Methods (SIAM 1997) studies the end game of these methods: how fast μ\muμ decreases once the iterates are close to the solution set, and how to jump from an interior iterate to an exact solution.

The finite termination procedure formalized here is due to Ye (Math. Programming 1992): guess the optimal partition from the current iterate and project onto the face of the feasible set it determines. The superlinear analysis of the affine-scaling step goes back to Ye, Güler, Tapia and Zhang (Math. Programming 1993); its key uniform bound on weighted least-squares solutions was proved independently by Stewart (Linear Algebra Appl. 1989) and Todd (Oper. Res. 1990). The bound on solutions of linear systems used throughout is Hoffman's (J. Res. Nat. Bur. Standards 1952).

Setting

Fix A∈Rm×nA \in \mathbb{R}^{m\times n}A∈Rm×n, b∈Rmb \in \mathbb{R}^mb∈Rm, c∈Rnc \in \mathbb{R}^nc∈Rn, with no assumption on the rank of AAA. The primal problem is min⁡cTx\min c^{\mathsf T}xmincTx subject to Ax=bAx = bAx=b, x≥0x \ge 0x≥0; the dual is max⁡bTλ\max b^{\mathsf T}\lambdamaxbTλ subject to ATλ+s=cA^{\mathsf T}\lambda + s = cATλ+s=c, s≥0s \ge 0s≥0. Let ΩP\Omega_PΩP​ and ΩD\Omega_DΩD​ be their sets of optimal solutions and Ω=ΩP×ΩD\Omega = \Omega_P \times \Omega_DΩ=ΩP​×ΩD​. The optimal partition is

B={j:xj∗≠0 for some x∗∈ΩP},N={j:sj∗≠0 for some (λ∗,s∗)∈ΩD}.\mathcal B = \{j : x^*_j \ne 0 \text{ for some } x^* \in \Omega_P\},\qquad \mathcal N = \{j : s^*_j \ne 0 \text{ for some } (\lambda^*, s^*) \in \Omega_D\}.B={j:xj∗​=0 for some x∗∈ΩP​},N={j:sj∗​=0 for some (λ∗,s∗)∈ΩD​}.

A strictly complementary solution is (x∗,λ∗,s∗)∈Ω(x^*, \lambda^*, s^*) \in \Omega(x∗,λ∗,s∗)∈Ω with xi∗>0x^*_i > 0xi∗​>0 for i∈Bi \in \mathcal Bi∈B and si∗>0s^*_i > 0si∗​>0 for i∈Ni \in \mathcal Ni∈N. The quantity

ϵ(A,b,c)=min⁡(min⁡i∈Bsup⁡x∗∈ΩPxi∗, min⁡i∈Nsup⁡(λ∗,s∗)∈ΩDsi∗)\epsilon(A,b,c) = \min\Bigl(\min_{i\in\mathcal B}\sup_{x^*\in\Omega_P}x^*_i,\ \min_{i\in\mathcal N}\sup_{(\lambda^*,s^*)\in\Omega_D}s^*_i\Bigr)ϵ(A,b,c)=min(i∈Bmin​x∗∈ΩP​sup​xi∗​, i∈Nmin​(λ∗,s∗)∈ΩD​sup​si∗​)

measures how far the solution set reaches into each coordinate, and C3=ϵ(A,b,c)/nC_3 = \epsilon(A,b,c)/nC3​=ϵ(A,b,c)/n.

The strictly feasible set F∘\mathcal F^\circF∘ consists of triples (x,λ,s)(x,\lambda,s)(x,λ,s) with Ax=bAx = bAx=b, ATλ+s=cA^{\mathsf T}\lambda + s = cATλ+s=c, x>0x > 0x>0, s>0s > 0s>0. The duality measure is μ=xTs/n\mu = x^{\mathsf T}s/nμ=xTs/n. The wide neighborhood is N−∞(γ)={(x,λ,s)∈F∘:xisi≥γμ for all i}\mathcal N_{-\infty}(\gamma) = \{(x,\lambda,s) \in \mathcal F^\circ : x_is_i \ge \gamma\mu \text{ for all } i\}N−∞​(γ)={(x,λ,s)∈F∘:xi​si​≥γμ for all i} for γ∈(0,1)\gamma \in (0,1)γ∈(0,1), and the 2-norm neighborhood is N2(θ)={(x,λ,s)∈F∘:∥XSe−μe∥≤θμ}\mathcal N_2(\theta) = \{(x,\lambda,s) \in \mathcal F^\circ : \|XSe - \mu e\| \le \theta\mu\}N2​(θ)={(x,λ,s)∈F∘:∥XSe−μe∥≤θμ}, where XSeXSeXSe is the vector of products xisix_is_ixi​si​ and ∥⋅∥\|\cdot\|∥⋅∥ is Euclidean.

The affine-scaling direction at (x,λ,s)(x,\lambda,s)(x,λ,s) is any solution of

ATΔλ+Δs=0,AΔx=0,siΔxi+xiΔsi=−xisi (i=1,…,n).A^{\mathsf T}\Delta\lambda + \Delta s = 0,\qquad A\Delta x = 0,\qquad s_i\Delta x_i + x_i\Delta s_i = -x_is_i\ (i = 1,\dots,n).ATΔλ+Δs=0,AΔx=0,si​Δxi​+xi​Δsi​=−xi​si​ (i=1,…,n).

The partition estimate at (x,s)(x,s)(x,s) is B(x,s)={i:xi≥si}\mathcal B(x,s) = \{i : x_i \ge s_i\}B(x,s)={i:xi​≥si​}, N(x,s)={1,…,n}∖B(x,s)\mathcal N(x,s) = \{1,\dots,n\}\setminus\mathcal B(x,s)N(x,s)={1,…,n}∖B(x,s), and the projection problem of Ye's procedure is

min⁡(x∗,λ∗,s∗) 12∥x∗−x∥2+12∥s∗−s∥2  s.t.  Ax∗=b, ATλ∗+s∗=c, xN(x,s)∗=0, sB(x,s)∗=0.\min_{(x^*,\lambda^*,s^*)}\ \tfrac12\|x^*-x\|^2 + \tfrac12\|s^*-s\|^2\ \text{ s.t. }\ Ax^* = b,\ A^{\mathsf T}\lambda^* + s^* = c,\ x^*_{\mathcal N(x,s)} = 0,\ s^*_{\mathcal B(x,s)} = 0.(x∗,λ∗,s∗)min​ 21​∥x∗−x∥2+21​∥s∗−s∥2  s.t.  Ax∗=b, ATλ∗+s∗=c, xN(x,s)∗​=0, sB(x,s)∗​=0.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.12

For γ∈(0,1)\gamma \in (0,1)γ∈(0,1) there is a threshold μˉ>0\bar\mu > 0μˉ​>0 such that every (x,λ,s)∈N−∞(γ)(x,\lambda,s) \in \mathcal N_{-\infty}(\gamma)(x,λ,s)∈N−∞​(γ) with

0<μ≤μˉ0 < \mu \le \bar\mu0<μ≤μˉ​

satisfies (i) B(x,s)=B\mathcal B(x,s) = \mathcal BB(x,s)=B and N(x,s)=N\mathcal N(x,s) = \mathcal NN(x,s)=N, and (ii) the projection problem has a solution, and every solution is a strictly complementary solution. The threshold is existential, as printed; the goal does not fix its value.

Milestones on the way

  1. Lemma 5.13: for μ0>0\mu_0 > 0μ0​>0 there is C0C_0C0​ with ∥(x,s)∥≤C0\|(x,s)\| \le C_0∥(x,s)∥≤C0​ on N−∞(γ)∩{μ≤μ0}\mathcal N_{-\infty}(\gamma) \cap \{\mu \le \mu_0\}N−∞​(γ)∩{μ≤μ0​}, and there 0<xi≤μ/C30 < x_i \le \mu/C_30<xi​≤μ/C3​ (i∈Ni \in \mathcal Ni∈N), 0<si≤μ/C30 < s_i \le \mu/C_30<si​≤μ/C3​ (i∈Bi \in \mathcal Bi∈B), si≥C3γs_i \ge C_3\gammasi​≥C3​γ (i∈Ni \in \mathcal Ni∈N), xi≥C3γx_i \ge C_3\gammaxi​≥C3​γ (i∈Bi \in \mathcal Bi∈B).
  2. Lemma A.3 (Hoffman): for matrices G,HG, HG,H there is L≥0L \ge 0L≥0 such that for every (g,h)∈Range⁡([G;H])(g,h) \in \operatorname{Range}([G;H])(g,h)∈Range([G;H]) the system Gw≤gGw \le gGw≤g, Hw=hHw = hHw=h has a solution with ∥w∥≤L∥(g,h)∥\|w\| \le L\|(g,h)\|∥w∥≤L∥(g,h)∥.

Further results on the same objects

  1. Lemma 7.1: for the affine-scaling direction on N−∞(γ)\mathcal N_{-\infty}(\gamma)N−∞​(γ), ∥ΔxN∥≤C4μ\|\Delta x_{\mathcal N}\| \le C_4\mu∥ΔxN​∥≤C4​μ and ∥ΔsB∥≤C4μ\|\Delta s_{\mathcal B}\| \le C_4\mu∥ΔsB​∥≤C4​μ with C4=n/(γ1/2C3)C_4 = n/(\gamma^{1/2}C_3)C4​=n/(γ1/2C3​).
  2. Lemma A.4 (Stewart–Todd): for HHH of full row rank, sup⁡Σ∥ΣHT(HΣHT)−1∥\sup_{\Sigma}\|\Sigma H^{\mathsf T}(H\Sigma H^{\mathsf T})^{-1}\|supΣ​∥ΣHT(HΣHT)−1∥ over positive diagonal Σ\SigmaΣ is finite.
  3. Lemma 7.2: there is C^≥0\hat C \ge 0C^≥0 depending only on HHH such that for h∈Range⁡(H)h \in \operatorname{Range}(H)h∈Range(H) and nonsingular diagonal Σ\SigmaΣ, the unique solution of min⁡12∥Σw∥2\min\frac12\|\Sigma w\|^2min21​∥Σw∥2 s.t. Hw=hHw = hHw=h has norm at most C^∥h∥\hat C\|h\|C^∥h∥.
  4. Theorem 7.4: there is C5C_5C5​, depending only on A,b,c,γA, b, c, \gammaA,b,c,γ, with ∥(Δx,Δs)∥≤C5μ\|(\Delta x,\Delta s)\| \le C_5\mu∥(Δx,Δs)∥≤C5​μ for the affine-scaling direction at every point of N−∞(γ)\mathcal N_{-\infty}(\gamma)N−∞​(γ).
  5. Lemma 7.6: with C5C_5C5​ from Theorem 7.4 at γ=0.5\gamma = 0.5γ=0.5, from N2(0.25)\mathcal N_2(0.25)N2​(0.25) the affine-scaling step stays in N2(0.5)\mathcal N_2(0.5)N2​(0.5) for every α∈[0,1−4C52μ]\alpha \in [0, 1 - 4C_5^2\mu]α∈[0,1−4C52​μ], so the largest such step satisfies α≥1−4C52μ\alpha \ge 1 - 4C_5^2\muα≥1−4C52​μ.

Significance

Theorem 7.12 turns any path-following method into a finite algorithm: once μ\muμ falls below μˉ\bar\muμˉ​, one linear least-squares problem, costing about one interior-point iteration, returns an exact strictly complementary solution, and with it the optimal partition. For integer data the threshold is bounded below by 2−O(L)2^{-O(L)}2−O(L), which is how interior-point methods are made to terminate exactly within their polynomial iteration bounds (Chapter 3 of the book). Theorem 7.4 and Lemma 7.6 give the competing route — the affine-scaling step is O(μ)O(\mu)O(μ), so predictor steps approach full length and the predictor-corrector method converges two-step quadratically.

None of these results is formalized on the platform. Hoffman's error bound exists there for a single consistent system with a constant chosen after the right-hand side; Lemma A.3 and its variant need one constant for all right-hand sides. The optimal partition, ϵ(A,b,c)\epsilon(A,b,c)ϵ(A,b,c), the uniform weighted least-squares bound and the projection step are reusable for any formal treatment of interior-point methods, degenerate linear programs or error bounds.

Difficulty

Near a degenerate solution set the linear systems defining the affine-scaling step become arbitrarily ill-conditioned: the diagonal scaling X1/2S−1/2X^{1/2}S^{-1/2}X1/2S−1/2 has entries tending to 000 and to ∞\infty∞, and the coefficient matrix has no nonsingular limit unless the solution is unique. Any bound that passes through the conditioning of that matrix degrades as μ→0\mu \to 0μ→0; the constants of Theorem 7.4 and Lemma 7.2 must be independent of the scaling. For Theorem 7.12 the difficulty is uniformity in the other direction: the threshold must be one number for the whole neighborhood, which needs a bound on the distance from an iterate to a face of the feasible set that does not depend on the iterate.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin m) (Fin n) ℝ, points are triples (x, lam, s); the Euclidean norm is defined explicitly (Mathlib's default on Fin n → ℝ is the sup norm). Directions and the projection problem are defined by their equations and optimality, never by closed-form formulas. ϵ(A,b,c)\epsilon(A,b,c)ϵ(A,b,c) uses real suprema, which agree with the book's whenever F∘≠∅\mathcal F^\circ \ne \emptysetF∘=∅; every theorem is vacuous otherwise. No rank assumption on AAA is made except in Lemma A.4, where the page states it. Ω≠∅\Omega \ne \emptysetΩ=∅ is not a hypothesis: membership in a neighborhood implies it.

Explicit constants: the book writes "there is a constant" in Lemmas 5.13 and 7.1; their proofs give C3=ϵ(A,b,c)/nC_3 = \epsilon(A,b,c)/nC3​=ϵ(A,b,c)/n (5.32) and C4=n/(γ1/2C3)C_4 = n/(\gamma^{1/2}C_3)C4​=n/(γ1/2C3​) (7.6), which are used. The constants C0C_0C0​, LLL, C^\hat CC^, C5C_5C5​, μˉ\bar\muμˉ​ have no closed form in the book (they come from Lemma 2.5, Hoffman's lemma and Lemma 7.2) and stay existential, but each is quantified before the point, the right-hand side or the scaling it must work for; a constant chosen after the point would make Theorem 7.4 trivial. A trivializing form of the goal — a threshold allowed to be 000, or a conclusion about some minimizer chosen by the solver — is ruled out by requiring μˉ>0\bar\mu > 0μˉ​>0, existence of a minimizer, and strict complementarity of every minimizer (λ∗\lambda^*λ∗ is not unique). In Lemma 7.6 the largest step is a hypothesis (IsGreatest), and the statement also asserts that the whole interval [0,1−4C52μ][0, 1-4C_5^2\mu][0,1−4C52​μ] is admissible.

Beyond the paper: one variant is posed. lemma_A_3_strong (strengthened, finding F1) is Lemma A.3 for every consistent system Gw≤gGw \le gGw≤g, Hw=hHw = hHw=h instead of (g,h)∈Range⁡([G;H])(g,h) \in \operatorname{Range}([G;H])(g,h)∈Range([G;H]); this is Hoffman's 1952 theorem. Finding F2 records that the printed proof of Theorem 7.4 covers only full-row-rank AAA; the statement is kept as printed.

Needed infrastructure: LP optimal solution sets and the optimal partition, matrix inverses and ranks, finite sums. A uniform Hoffman bound and the Stewart–Todd bound are reusable well beyond this mission; contributions of either are welcome.

Selected references

  • S. J. Wright, Primal-Dual Interior-Point Methods, SIAM, Philadelphia, 1997. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611971453
  • Y. Ye, On the finite convergence of interior-point algorithms for linear programming, Mathematical Programming 57 (1992), 325–335. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581087
  • Y. Ye, O. Güler, R. A. Tapia, Y. Zhang, A quadratically convergent O(nL)O(\sqrt n L)O(n​L)-iteration algorithm for linear programming, Mathematical Programming 59 (1993), 151–162. https://doi.org/10.1007/BF01581242
  • A. J. Hoffman, On approximate solutions of systems of linear inequalities, Journal of Research of the National Bureau of Standards 49 (1952), 263–265. https://doi.org/10.6028/jres.049.027
  • G. W. Stewart, On scaled projections and pseudoinverses, Linear Algebra and its Applications 112 (1989), 189–193. https://doi.org/10.1016/0024-3795(89)90594-6
  • M. J. Todd, A Dantzig–Wolfe-like variant of Karmarkar's interior-point linear programming algorithm, Operations Research 38 (1990), 1006–1018. https://doi.org/10.1287/opre.38.6.1006
9 thms0 active usersReviewed
Functional AnalysisMachine LearningProbability+1·Captain: Shuze Chen

The Nature of Statistical Learning Theory VII: Tikhonov Regularization of Ill-Posed ProblemsTextbook

Why ill-posed problems appear in learning

Estimating a probability density, a conditional probability or a conditional density from data can be written as solving a linear operator equation Af=FAf = FAf=F whose right-hand side FFF is a distribution function. The true FFF is unknown; only its empirical estimate FℓF_\ellFℓ​ is available, built from ℓ\ellℓ observations. The Glivenko–Cantelli theorem and the Kolmogorov–Smirnov law (Vapnik 2000, §7.3) guarantee that FℓF_\ellFℓ​ is close to FFF in the uniform metric. However, the operator AAA (for densities, integration) has an unbounded inverse. A small change in the right-hand side can produce an arbitrarily large change in the solution, so solving Af=FℓAf = F_\ellAf=Fℓ​ directly gives nonsense. Hadamard called such problems ill-posed.

Regularization handles this. Tikhonov (1963) proposed replacing the equation by the minimization of a penalized residual. Tikhonov and Arsenin (1977) proved that the regularized solutions converge to the true solution when the data error and the regularization parameter go to zero together in a controlled way. Vapnik and Stefanyuk (1978) extended this to random right-hand sides, the case of statistical estimation, and Stefanyuk (1986) to the case where the operator is estimated as well. Chapter 7 of The Nature of Statistical Learning Theory collects these results, without proofs, as the foundation of its SVM approach to density and conditional-probability estimation. This mission formalizes them.

Setting

Let (E1,ρE1)(E_1, \rho_{E_1})(E1​,ρE1​​) and (E2,ρE2)(E_2, \rho_{E_2})(E2​,ρE2​​) be metric spaces and A:E1→E2A : E_1 \to E_2A:E1​→E2​ a continuous one-to-one operator. The operator equation (7.12) is Af=FAf = FAf=F. Its solution fff exists and is unique, but A−1A^{-1}A−1 need not be continuous.

A regularization functional is a map Ω:E1→[0,∞]\Omega : E_1 \to [0, \infty]Ω:E1​→[0,∞] that is lower semicontinuous and whose sublevel sets {g:Ω(g)≤c}\{g : \Omega(g) \le c\}{g:Ω(g)≤c} are compact for every c>0c > 0c>0. Its domain is {Ω<∞}\{\Omega < \infty\}{Ω<∞}. In Lean this is NatureSLT.IllPosed.IsRegularizer.

Tikhonov's functional (Method T) for a parameter γ>0\gamma > 0γ>0 and a right-hand side F′F'F′ is

WT(g)=ρE22(Ag,F′)+γ Ω(g),W_T(g) = \rho^2_{E_2}(A g, F') + \gamma\, \Omega(g),WT​(g)=ρE2​2​(Ag,F′)+γΩ(g),

which is NatureSLT.IllPosed.tikhonovFunctional. A regularized solution is any minimizer of WTW_TWT​ over E1E_1E1​.

In the deterministic problem, for every δ>0\delta > 0δ>0 an approximation FδF_\deltaFδ​ with ρE2(F,Fδ)≤δ\rho_{E_2}(F, F_\delta) \le \deltaρE2​​(F,Fδ​)≤δ is given, and fδf_\deltafδ​ minimizes WTW_TWT​ with F′=FδF' = F_\deltaF′=Fδ​ and γ=γ(δ)\gamma = \gamma(\delta)γ=γ(δ). In the stochastic problem, FℓF_\ellFℓ​ are random elements of E2E_2E2​ converging to FFF in probability, and fℓf_\ellfℓ​ minimizes WTW_TWT​ with F′=FℓF' = F_\ellF′=Fℓ​ and γ=γℓ→0\gamma = \gamma_\ell \to 0γ=γℓ​→0. When the operator is also estimated by random continuous operators AℓA_\ellAℓ​, their distance to AAA is measured by (7.48),

∥Aℓ−A∥=sup⁡Ω(f)<∞ρE2(Aℓf,Af)Ω1/2(f),\|A_\ell - A\| = \sup_{\Omega(f) < \infty} \frac{\rho_{E_2}(A_\ell f, A f)}{\Omega^{1/2}(f)},∥Aℓ​−A∥=Ω(f)<∞sup​Ω1/2(f)ρE2​​(Aℓ​f,Af)​,

which is NatureSLT.IllPosed.operatorDistance.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 7.1 (p. 238)

Let the exact solution fff lie in the domain of Ω\OmegaΩ, and suppose γ(δ)>0\gamma(\delta) > 0γ(δ)>0 satisfies (7.17):

γ(δ)→0 (δ→0),lim sup⁡δ→0+δ2γ(δ)≤r<∞.\gamma(\delta) \to 0 \ (\delta \to 0), \qquad \limsup_{\delta \to 0^+} \frac{\delta^2}{\gamma(\delta)} \le r < \infty .γ(δ)→0 (δ→0),δ→0+limsup​γ(δ)δ2​≤r<∞.

Then every family of minimizers fδf_\deltafδ​ of ρE22(Ag,Fδ)+γ(δ)Ω(g)\rho^2_{E_2}(Ag, F_\delta) + \gamma(\delta)\Omega(g)ρE2​2​(Ag,Fδ​)+γ(δ)Ω(g) satisfies fδ→ff_\delta \to ffδ​→f in E1E_1E1​ as δ→0+\delta \to 0^+δ→0+. This is the weakest statement in the chapter: it fixes no rate and assumes only metric structure.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 7.2 (p. 238). E1E_1E1​ is a real Hilbert space, AAA is linear, Ω(f)=∥f∥2\Omega(f) = \|f\|^2Ω(f)=∥f∥2, γ(δ)→0\gamma(\delta) \to 0γ(δ)→0 and δ2/γ(δ)→0\delta^2/\gamma(\delta) \to 0δ2/γ(δ)→0 (7.18). Then minimizers of (7.19) converge to fff in norm.
  2. Theorem 7.3 (p. 239). For any ε,μ>0\varepsilon, \mu > 0ε,μ>0 there is n(ε,μ)n(\varepsilon,\mu)n(ε,μ) such that for all ℓ>n(ε,μ)\ell > n(\varepsilon,\mu)ℓ>n(ε,μ)
P{ρE1(fℓ,f)>ε}≤P{ρE2(Fℓ,F)>γℓ μ}.(7.21)P\{\rho_{E_1}(f_\ell, f) > \varepsilon\} \le P\{\rho_{E_2}(F_\ell, F) > \sqrt{\gamma_\ell\,\mu}\}. \tag{7.21}P{ρE1​​(fℓ​,f)>ε}≤P{ρE2​​(Fℓ​,F)>γℓ​μ​}.(7.21)
  1. Theorem 7.4 (p. 239). E1E_1E1​ Hilbert, AAA linear, Ω(f)=∥f∥2\Omega(f) = \|f\|^2Ω(f)=∥f∥2. For any ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 there is n(ε)n(\varepsilon)n(ε) such that for all ℓ>n(ε)\ell > n(\varepsilon)ℓ>n(ε)
P{∥fℓ−f∥2>ε}<2 P{ρE22(Fℓ,F)>ε2γℓ}.P\{\|f_\ell - f\|^2 > \varepsilon\} < 2\,P\{\rho^2_{E_2}(F_\ell, F) > \tfrac{\varepsilon}{2}\gamma_\ell\}.P{∥fℓ​−f∥2>ε}<2P{ρE2​2​(Fℓ​,F)>2ε​γℓ​}.
  1. Theorem 7.5 (p. 251). For any ε>0\varepsilon > 0ε>0 and constants C1,C2>0C_1, C_2 > 0C1​,C2​>0 there is γ0>0\gamma_0 > 0γ0​>0 such that for any γℓ≤γ0\gamma_\ell \le \gamma_0γℓ​≤γ0​
P{ρE1(fℓ,f)>ε}≤P{ρE2(Fℓ,F)>C1γℓ}+P{∥Aℓ−A∥>C2γℓ}.(7.49)P\{\rho_{E_1}(f_\ell, f) > \varepsilon\} \le P\{\rho_{E_2}(F_\ell, F) > C_1\sqrt{\gamma_\ell}\} + P\{\|A_\ell - A\| > C_2\sqrt{\gamma_\ell}\}. \tag{7.49}P{ρE1​​(fℓ​,f)>ε}≤P{ρE2​​(Fℓ​,F)>C1​γℓ​​}+P{∥Aℓ​−A∥>C2​γℓ​​}.(7.49)

The constants are the book's: the rrr of (7.17), the γℓμ\sqrt{\gamma_\ell\mu}γℓ​μ​ of (7.21), the factor 222 and the threshold ε2γℓ\tfrac{\varepsilon}{2}\gamma_\ell2ε​γℓ​ of Theorem 7.4, and the C1γℓC_1\sqrt{\gamma_\ell}C1​γℓ​​, C2γℓC_2\sqrt{\gamma_\ell}C2​γℓ​​ of (7.49).

Significance

Theorem 7.1 is what makes regularization a method rather than a heuristic: it names the admissible parameter choices, γ(δ)→0\gamma(\delta) \to 0γ(δ)→0 no faster than δ2\delta^2δ2, under which the regularized solution recovers the true one. Theorems 7.3 and 7.4 turn it into probability statements. Combined with any rate of convergence of the empirical distribution function, they give consistency of density estimation by Method T, which is the Corollary on p. 239. Theorem 7.5 does the same when the operator itself is estimated from data, as in conditional probability estimation (§7.9). Chapter 7's SVM estimators of densities and conditional probabilities rest on these statements.

The results are classical and proved in the literature cited. None of them is machine-checked. The platform has Tikhonov-regularized dynamics (TikhonovHDD) and finite-dimensional ridge identities (RobustLS.Tikhonov), but not the convergence theory of Tikhonov's method for operator equations. A formalization supplies a reusable notion of regularization functional on a metric space, the Tikhonov functional over [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and the operator distance (7.48), for later work on inverse problems and nonparametric estimation.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, inverting AAA and passing to the limit, fails because A−1A^{-1}A−1 is not continuous: ρE2(Afδ,F)→0\rho_{E_2}(Af_\delta, F) \to 0ρE2​​(Afδ​,F)→0 alone does not force fδ→ff_\delta \to ffδ​→f. The deterministic theorems need control of the regularized solutions that the residual does not give, and in Theorem 7.2 that control must be obtained without compact sublevel sets, since the balls of an infinite-dimensional Hilbert space are not compact. In the stochastic theorems the difficulty is uniformity: a deterministic convergence statement for each outcome does not give the explicit comparison of probabilities that (7.21) and (7.49) assert. In (7.49) the bound must hold for every parameter below a threshold that depends only on ε\varepsilonε, C1C_1C1​, C2C_2C2​.

Two warnings from reading the chapter apply. Theorem 7.4 as printed is false: with exact data (Fℓ=FF_\ell = FFℓ​=F) both probabilities vanish for all large ℓ\ellℓ, and the strict inequality 0<00 < 00<0 fails (finding F1). Also, the three "uniqueness" properties of Ω\OmegaΩ listed on p. 235 are mutually inconsistent at f=0f = 0f=0, which is why they are not assumed (finding F3).

Formalization scope

All statements live in NatureSLT.IllPosed. Ω\OmegaΩ takes values in ℝ≥0∞. The book's "positive" is nonnegativity and its domain F\mathcal FF is {Ω≠∞}\{\Omega \ne \infty\}{Ω=∞}. "Semicontinuous" is lower semicontinuity. The exact solution is assumed to lie in the domain of Ω\OmegaΩ (the book assumes this tacitly); otherwise every point could minimize WTW_TWT​. Every theorem is stated for every family of minimizers, given as a hypothesis, never for a chosen sequence, and does not assert that minimizers exist. Statements of the form "there exists a sequence that converges" are a trivializing formalization and are ruled out. The limit in (7.17) is read as a limsup in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞], and δ→0\delta \to 0δ→0 is taken along δ>0\delta > 0δ>0. Hilbert spaces are real. Linearity of AAA (Theorems 7.2 and 7.4) makes E2E_2E2​ a real normed space. In the stochastic theorems the probability space (S,P)(S, P)(S,P) is arbitrary, and the random elements FℓF_\ellFℓ​, fℓf_\ellfℓ​ (and in 7.5 the random distance ∥Aℓ−A∥\|A_\ell - A\|∥Aℓ​−A∥) are Borel measurable by hypothesis, so no event gets probability zero by convention. In (7.48) a point with Ω(f)=0\Omega(f) = 0Ω(f)=0 contributes 000 if Aℓf=AfA_\ell f = AfAℓ​f=Af and ∞\infty∞ otherwise. In Theorem 7.5, γ0\gamma_0γ0​ is quantified before the random data, so it is uniform over all of them.

Beyond the paper. One variant item is posed: [Corrected] Theorem 7.4, the same statement with ≤\le≤ in place of <<<. Its evidence is the exact-data counterexample above, which has been checked in Lean. The faithful Theorem 7.4 stays a milestone.

Not included: the Glivenko–Cantelli theorem in the book's in-probability form (the platform's GlivenkoCantelli.glivenko_cantelli is the almost-sure form), the Kolmogorov–Smirnov limit laws (7.10)–(7.11), and Theorem 7.6, whose notion of consistency is not pinned down on the page. Contributions welcome: compactness arguments in metric spaces, weak compactness and the Radon–Riesz property in Hilbert spaces, and measurability lemmas for minimizers.

Selected references

  • V. N. Vapnik, The Nature of Statistical Learning Theory, 2nd ed., Springer, 2000, Chapter 7. https://doi.org/10.1007/978-1-4757-3264-1
  • A. N. Tikhonov, "On solving ill-posed problem and method of regularization", Doklady Akademii Nauk USSR 153 (1963), 501–504 (as cited in Vapnik 2000; no stable link).
  • A. N. Tikhonov and V. Y. Arsenin, Solution of Ill-Posed Problems, W. H. Winston, Washington, DC, 1977 (no stable link).
  • V. N. Vapnik and A. R. Stefanyuk, "Nonparametric methods for estimating probability densities", Automation and Remote Control (8), 1978 (as cited in Vapnik 2000; no stable link).
  • A. R. Stefanyuk, 1986, cited in Vapnik 2000, p. 251, for Theorem 7.5; the book's bibliography gives no entry for it.
  • V. N. Vapnik, Statistical Learning Theory, Wiley, 1998, which contains the proofs the 2000 book omits (no stable link).
8 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraMarkov ChainOperations Research+2·Captain: Shuze Chen

Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling XI: First Passage Times by Reduction and BisectionTextbook

Motivation

In a quasi-birth-and-death process (QBD) a queue length or buffer content (the level) moves up or down by at most one per step while an auxiliary Markov environment (the phase) modulates the rates. When buffers are bounded the level lives in {0,1,…,M}\{0,1,\dots,M\}{0,1,…,M}, and a basic performance question is how long it takes, on average, for an initially empty buffer to fill: the expected first passage time from the bottom level to the top level. Overflow and loss analyses of finite-buffer queues in telecommunication and manufacturing models ask exactly this quantity, and higher moments follow from the same linear systems.

Chapter 11 of Latouche and Ramaswami's Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling (SIAM 1999) gives two exact algorithms for it: a linear level reduction, adding one level at a time (Gaver, Jacobs and Latouche, Advances in Applied Probability, 1984), and a reduction by bisection that doubles the number of levels at each step (Latouche and Ramaswami, Stochastic Models, 1995), reaching MMM levels in about log⁡2M\log_2 Mlog2​M steps. This mission formalizes the probabilistic identities on which both algorithms rest.

Setting

Fix M≥2M\ge2M≥2 and a finite set of mmm phases. The states are pairs (n,i)(n,i)(n,i) with level 0≤n≤M0\le n\le M0≤n≤M and phase iii; the level ℓ(n)\ell(n)ℓ(n) is {(n,i)}i\{(n,i)\}_i{(n,i)}i​. A finite QBD is the discrete-time Markov chain (Xk)(X_k)(Xk​) with block-tridiagonal transition matrix (10.2): from level nnn it moves up one level with the m×mm\times mm×m probability matrix A0A_0A0​, down one level with A2A_2A2​, and stays in its level with P00P_{00}P00​ at level 000, PMMP_{MM}PMM​ at level MMM and A1A_1A1​ in between. The matrix is stochastic and the chain is irreducible.

Let τ(k)=inf⁡{j>0:Xj∈ℓ(k)}\tau(k)=\inf\{j>0 : X_j\in\ell(k)\}τ(k)=inf{j>0:Xj​∈ℓ(k)}. For levels n≠kn\neq kn=k:

  • tn→kt_{n\to k}tn→k​ is the vector of expected first passage times E[τ(k)∣X0=(n,i)]\mathrm E[\tau(k)\mid X_0=(n,i)]E[τ(k)∣X0​=(n,i)];
  • Γn→k\Gamma_{n\to k}Γn→k​ is the matrix of first passage probabilities P[Xτ(k)=(k,j)∣X0=(n,i)]\mathrm P[X_{\tau(k)}=(k,j)\mid X_0=(n,i)]P[Xτ(k)​=(k,j)∣X0​=(n,i)];

with tn→n=0t_{n\to n}=0tn→n​=0 and Γn→n=I\Gamma_{n\to n}=IΓn→n​=I. For 1≤i≤n≤M−11\le i\le n\le M-11≤i≤n≤M−1 let θ(n)=min⁡(τ(0),τ(n+1))\theta^{(n)}=\min(\tau(0),\tau(n+1))θ(n)=min(τ(0),τ(n+1)) be the first exit time from the block ℓ(1)∪⋯∪ℓ(n)\ell(1)\cup\dots\cup\ell(n)ℓ(1)∪⋯∪ℓ(n), and let

  • si(n)s_i^{(n)}si(n)​ be the vector of expected exit times E[θ(n)∣X0=(i,p)]\mathrm E[\theta^{(n)}\mid X_0=(i,p)]E[θ(n)∣X0​=(i,p)];
  • Gi(n)G_i^{(n)}Gi(n)​ and Γi(n)\Gamma_i^{(n)}Γi(n)​ be the matrices of probabilities, starting from ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i), that the exit is into ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0), respectively ℓ(n+1)\ell(n+1)ℓ(n+1), and in a given arrival phase.

All of these are taboo quantities of the chain: probabilities of sets of trajectories and expected values of hitting times.

Formalization targets

Goal: Lemma 11.3.1

For M≥2M\ge2M≥2, the matrix I−Γ0→1G1(M−1)I-\Gamma_{0\to1}G_1^{(M-1)}I−Γ0→1​G1(M−1)​ is nonsingular and

t0→M=(I−Γ0→1G1(M−1))−1{t0→1+Γ0→1s1(M−1)}.t_{0\to M}=(I-\Gamma_{0\to1}G_1^{(M-1)})^{-1}\{t_{0\to1}+\Gamma_{0\to1}s_1^{(M-1)}\}.t0→M​=(I−Γ0→1​G1(M−1)​)−1{t0→1​+Γ0→1​s1(M−1)​}.

Milestones

  1. Lemma 11.2.1. For 0≤n<k≤M0\le n<k\le M0≤n<k≤M: tn→k=tn→n+1+Γn→n+1tn+1→kt_{n\to k}=t_{n\to n+1}+\Gamma_{n\to n+1}t_{n+1\to k}tn→k​=tn→n+1​+Γn→n+1​tn+1→k​ and Γn→k=Γn→n+1Γn+1→k\Gamma_{n\to k}=\Gamma_{n\to n+1}\Gamma_{n+1\to k}Γn→k​=Γn→n+1​Γn+1→k​.
  2. Lemma 11.2.2. With C0=P00C_0=P_{00}C0​=P00​ and Cn=A1+A2Γn−1→nC_n=A_1+A_2\Gamma_{n-1\to n}Cn​=A1​+A2​Γn−1→n​: Γn→n+1=(I−Cn)−1A0\Gamma_{n\to n+1}=(I-C_n)^{-1}A_0Γn→n+1​=(I−Cn​)−1A0​ for 0≤n≤M−10\le n\le M-10≤n≤M−1, t0→1=(I−C0)−11t_{0\to1}=(I-C_0)^{-1}\mathbf 1t0→1​=(I−C0​)−11, and tn→n+1=(I−Cn)−11+(I−Cn)−1A2tn−1→nt_{n\to n+1}=(I-C_n)^{-1}\mathbf 1+(I-C_n)^{-1}A_2t_{n-1\to n}tn→n+1​=(I−Cn​)−11+(I−Cn​)−1A2​tn−1→n​ for 1≤n≤M−11\le n\le M-11≤n≤M−1.
  3. Lemma 11.3.2. For n,ν≥1n,\nu\ge1n,ν≥1 with n+ν≤M−1n+\nu\le M-1n+ν≤M−1, 1≤i≤n1\le i\le n1≤i≤n, 1≤j≤ν1\le j\le\nu1≤j≤ν: Gi(n+ν)=Gi(n)+Γi(n)G1(ν)Gn(n+ν)G_i^{(n+\nu)}=G_i^{(n)}+\Gamma_i^{(n)}G_1^{(\nu)}G_n^{(n+\nu)}Gi(n+ν)​=Gi(n)​+Γi(n)​G1(ν)​Gn(n+ν)​, Gn+j(n+ν)=Gj(ν)Gn(n+ν)G_{n+j}^{(n+\nu)}=G_j^{(\nu)}G_n^{(n+\nu)}Gn+j(n+ν)​=Gj(ν)​Gn(n+ν)​, Γi(n+ν)=Γi(n)Γn+1(n+ν)\Gamma_i^{(n+\nu)}=\Gamma_i^{(n)}\Gamma_{n+1}^{(n+\nu)}Γi(n+ν)​=Γi(n)​Γn+1(n+ν)​, Γn+j(n+ν)=Γj(ν)+Gj(ν)Γn(n)Γn+1(n+ν)\Gamma_{n+j}^{(n+\nu)}=\Gamma_j^{(\nu)}+G_j^{(\nu)}\Gamma_n^{(n)}\Gamma_{n+1}^{(n+\nu)}Γn+j(n+ν)​=Γj(ν)​+Gj(ν)​Γn(n)​Γn+1(n+ν)​, Gn(n+ν)=(I−Γn(n)G1(ν))−1Gn(n)G_n^{(n+\nu)}=(I-\Gamma_n^{(n)}G_1^{(\nu)})^{-1}G_n^{(n)}Gn(n+ν)​=(I−Γn(n)​G1(ν)​)−1Gn(n)​ and Γn+1(n+ν)=(I−G1(ν)Γn(n))−1Γ1(ν)\Gamma_{n+1}^{(n+\nu)}=(I-G_1^{(\nu)}\Gamma_n^{(n)})^{-1}\Gamma_1^{(\nu)}Γn+1(n+ν)​=(I−G1(ν)​Γn(n)​)−1Γ1(ν)​.
  4. Lemma 11.3.3. In the same range: si(n+ν)=si(n)+Γi(n)s1(ν)+Γi(n)G1(ν)sn(n+ν)s_i^{(n+\nu)}=s_i^{(n)}+\Gamma_i^{(n)}s_1^{(\nu)}+\Gamma_i^{(n)}G_1^{(\nu)}s_n^{(n+\nu)}si(n+ν)​=si(n)​+Γi(n)​s1(ν)​+Γi(n)​G1(ν)​sn(n+ν)​, sn(n+ν)=(I−Γn(n)G1(ν))−1{sn(n)+Γn(n)s1(ν)}s_n^{(n+\nu)}=(I-\Gamma_n^{(n)}G_1^{(\nu)})^{-1}\{s_n^{(n)}+\Gamma_n^{(n)}s_1^{(\nu)}\}sn(n+ν)​=(I−Γn(n)​G1(ν)​)−1{sn(n)​+Γn(n)​s1(ν)​} and sn+j(n+ν)=sj(ν)+Gj(ν)sn(n+ν)s_{n+j}^{(n+\nu)}=s_j^{(\nu)}+G_j^{(\nu)}s_n^{(n+\nu)}sn+j(n+ν)​=sj(ν)​+Gj(ν)​sn(n+ν)​.

The goal is the identity the bisection algorithm ends with. Milestones 3 and 4 are its doubling step, and milestones 1 and 2 give the linear algorithm.

Significance

Lemmas 11.2.1–11.2.2 justify the Linear Level Reduction Algorithm (Figure 11.1 of the book), which is block LU factorization of I−TI-TI−T for the transient part TTT of the chain. Lemmas 11.3.1–11.3.3 justify the Reduction by Bisection algorithm (Figure 11.2): it computes t0→Mt_{0\to M}t0→M​ with O(log⁡M)O(\log M)O(logM) products of m×mm\times mm×m matrices instead of O(M)O(M)O(M), using the fact that the levels 1,…,M−11,\dots,M-11,…,M−1 form a homogeneous block. The same decompositions, applied to the matrices GGG and Γ\GammaΓ, underlie the doubling and cyclic-reduction methods for infinite QBDs.

These results are proved in the book, partly in condensed form: Lemma 11.3.3 is left to the reader, and of the six relations of Lemma 11.3.2 only (11.13)–(11.15) and (11.17) are argued explicitly, the others "in a similar manner". No machine-checked version of any of them exists. The Prove2Me platform has finite and countable Markov chains (MarkovMixing) and scalar hitting-time results (MarkovMixing.gamblers_ruin), but no block-structured first passage theory. This mission supplies the strong-Markov decompositions at hitting times of level sets, in matrix form, together with the nonsingularity arguments that make the formulas well defined.

Difficulty

Every identity is a first-passage decomposition: condition on where the chain first enters a level, or first leaves a block of levels. Three points stop the obvious argument from being routine. First, the quantities are infinite sums over trajectories, and splitting a trajectory at a hitting time must be done as an exact bijection of taboo paths, with expected times given as tail sums. Second, the bisection lemmas compare exit probabilities of different blocks of levels. Gj(ν)G_j^{(\nu)}Gj(ν)​ is defined for the levels 1,…,ν1,\dots,\nu1,…,ν, but the relations use it for the shifted levels n+1,…,n+νn+1,\dots,n+\nun+1,…,n+ν. The shift is legitimate only because the transition matrix is homogeneous on the levels 1,…,M−11,\dots,M-11,…,M−1, and the identification has to be proved. Third, each inverse requires a spectral argument: the series ∑ν(Γ0→1G1(M−1))ν\sum_\nu(\Gamma_{0\to1}G_1^{(M-1)})^\nu∑ν​(Γ0→1​G1(M−1)​)ν converges because irreducibility forbids returning to ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0) forever without visiting ℓ(M)\ell(M)ℓ(M). Turning this into nonsingularity of a real matrix needs a bound on the spectral radius of a substochastic matrix, not a mere appeal to probability. Finiteness of every expectation likewise rests on irreducibility of the finite chain.

Formalization scope

States are pairs in N×ι\mathbb N\times\iotaN×ι with ι\iotaι a finite type. The transition matrix is (10.2) for the levels 0,…,M0,\dots,M0,…,M and 000 elsewhere. The standing assumptions (nonnegative blocks, stochastic rows, M≥1M\ge1M≥1, irreducibility on the levels 0,…,M0,\dots,M0,…,M) form one predicate. Probabilities and expectations are defined as sums over finite taboo trajectories of products of one-step probabilities, valued in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Expectations are tail sums ∑t≥0P[τ>t]\sum_{t\ge0}\mathrm P[\tau>t]∑t≥0​P[τ>t]. The quantities Gi(n),Γi(n),si(n)G_i^{(n)},\Gamma_i^{(n)},s_i^{(n)}Gi(n)​,Γi(n)​,si(n)​ are defined, as in the book, for the chain itself, and the theorems use them only in the book's range n+ν≤M−1n+\nu\le M-1n+ν≤M−1. Identities without an inverse are stated in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]. Identities with an inverse are stated between real matrices: each matrix inverted is proved nonsingular, and each expectation that is read as a real number is proved finite, both as part of the conclusion.

None of tn→kt_{n\to k}tn→k​, Γn→k\Gamma_{n\to k}Γn→k​, Gi(n)G_i^{(n)}Gi(n)​, Γi(n)\Gamma_i^{(n)}Γi(n)​, si(n)s_i^{(n)}si(n)​ may be defined as the solution of the chapter's equations. Doing so would make every target true by definition, so they are defined only as hitting quantities of the chain. Lemma 11.2.2 prints Cn=A1+A2(I−Cn−1−1)A0=A1+A2Γn−1→nC_n=A_1+A_2(I-C_{n-1}^{-1})A_0=A_1+A_2\Gamma_{n-1\to n}Cn​=A1​+A2​(I−Cn−1−1​)A0​=A1​+A2​Γn−1→n​, and the two printed expressions differ. The faithful statement uses the second one, A1+A2Γn−1→nA_1+A_2\Gamma_{n-1\to n}A1​+A2​Γn−1→n​.

Beyond the paper. One variant is posed, level_by_level_corrected (kind: corrected). It states Lemma 11.2.2 with Cn=A1+A2(I−Cn−1)−1A0C_n=A_1+A_2(I-C_{n-1})^{-1}A_0Cn​=A1​+A2​(I−Cn−1​)−1A0​, the recursion (10.3) the proof cites. Evidence: with one phase, P00=2/3P_{00}=2/3P00​=2/3 and A0=A1=A2=1/3A_0=A_1=A_2=1/3A0​=A1​=A2​=1/3, the printed first expression gives C1=5/18C_1=5/18C1​=5/18, whereas A1+A2Γ0→1=2/3A_1+A_2\Gamma_{0\to1}=2/3A1​+A2​Γ0→1​=2/3.

A complete development needs the following. Strong-Markov path splitting for path-sum hitting quantities is reusable for any countable chain. So are the convergence of ∑Mν\sum M^\nu∑Mν and the nonsingularity of I−MI-MI−M for substochastic matrices that cannot keep mass forever. Contributions of either as standalone lemmas are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling, ASA-SIAM Series on Statistics and Applied Probability, SIAM, 1999, Chapters 10–11. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719734
  • D. P. Gaver, P. A. Jacobs and G. Latouche, Finite birth-and-death models in randomly changing environments, Advances in Applied Probability 16 (1984), 715–731 (reference [26] of the book).
  • G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, Expected passage times in homogeneous quasi-birth-and-death processes, Communications in Statistics. Stochastic Models 11 (1995), 103–122 (reference [54] of the book).
8 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraMarkov ChainOperations Research+2·Captain: Shuze Chen

Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling VIII: The Logarithmic Reduction Series for GTextbook

Motivation

Quasi-birth-and-death processes (QBDs) are Markov chains on pairs (level, phase) in which the level moves by at most one at each step. They model queues in random environments, priority queues, and many other systems treated by matrix-analytic methods (Latouche & Ramaswami 1999). Their stationary distribution, when it exists, is matrix-geometric, and computing it reduces to computing one matrix: the first-passage matrix GGG, which records where the chain first lands when it moves down one level. Every algorithm for a QBD's stationary distribution is, at its core, an algorithm for GGG (or for the related matrices UUU and RRR).

The logarithmic reduction algorithm of Latouche & Ramaswami (1993) computes GGG with a number of iterations proportional to the logarithm of the number needed by the basic linear schemes. It is still among the fastest general-purpose methods, alongside the closely related cyclic reduction (Bini, Latouche & Meini 2005). Its correctness rests on one identity: an infinite series built from a purely algebraic recursion equals the probabilistically defined matrix GGG. This mission formalizes that identity, Theorem 8.4.1 of Latouche & Ramaswami's textbook, together with the intermediate equations of its proof and the convergence statement Theorem 8.4.2.

Setting

Let ι\iotaι be a countable set of phases, finite or infinite, and let B,A0,A1,A2B, A_0, A_1, A_2B,A0​,A1​,A2​ be nonnegative matrices indexed by ι\iotaι. The homogeneous QBD is the Markov chain {Xt}\{X_t\}{Xt​} on the states (n,i)(n, i)(n,i), n≥0n \ge 0n≥0 the level and i∈ιi \in \iotai∈ι the phase, whose transition matrix (8.1) is block tridiagonal:

  • from level 000 the chain stays in level 000 with probabilities BBB and moves to level 111 with probabilities A0A_0A0​;
  • from a level n≥1n \ge 1n≥1 it moves up with A0A_0A0​, stays in the level with A1A_1A1​, and moves down with A2A_2A2​.

The matrix is assumed stochastic and irreducible, which is the standing assumption of Chapter 8. Write ℓ(n)\ell(n)ℓ(n) for level nnn, γ(n)=inf⁡{t≥1:Xt∈ℓ(n)}\gamma(n) = \inf\{t \ge 1 : X_t \in \ell(n)\}γ(n)=inf{t≥1:Xt​∈ℓ(n)}, and δ(k)=inf⁡{t≥0:Xt∈ℓ(2k)}\delta(k) = \inf\{t \ge 0 : X_t \in \ell(2^k)\}δ(k)=inf{t≥0:Xt​∈ℓ(2k)}.

The first-passage matrix is

Gij=P[γ(0)<∞ & Xγ(0)=(0,j)∣X0=(1,i)].G_{ij} = \mathrm P[\gamma(0) < \infty \ \&\ X_{\gamma(0)} = (0, j) \mid X_0 = (1, i)].Gij​=P[γ(0)<∞ & Xγ(0)​=(0,j)∣X0​=(1,i)].

It is the probability, starting at level 1 in phase iii, of ever reaching level 0 and of doing so first in phase jjj.

With the book's convention (I−M)−1:=∑ν≥0Mν(I - M)^{-1} := \sum_{\nu \ge 0} M^\nu(I−M)−1:=∑ν≥0​Mν, the logarithmic reduction recursion is

H[0]=(I−A1)−1A0,L[0]=(I−A1)−1A2,H[k+1]=(I−U[k])−1(H[k])2,L[k+1]=(I−U[k])−1(L[k])2,H^{[0]} = (I - A_1)^{-1}A_0,\quad L^{[0]} = (I - A_1)^{-1}A_2,\quad H^{[k+1]} = (I - U^{[k]})^{-1}(H^{[k]})^2,\quad L^{[k+1]} = (I - U^{[k]})^{-1}(L^{[k]})^2,H[0]=(I−A1​)−1A0​,L[0]=(I−A1​)−1A2​,H[k+1]=(I−U[k])−1(H[k])2,L[k+1]=(I−U[k])−1(L[k])2,

with U[k]=H[k]L[k]+L[k]H[k]U^{[k]} = H^{[k]}L^{[k]} + L^{[k]}H^{[k]}U[k]=H[k]L[k]+L[k]H[k]. It involves only the blocks A0,A1,A2A_0, A_1, A_2A0​,A1​,A2​.

Formalization targets

Goal: the logarithmic reduction series (Theorem 8.4.1)

G=∑k≥0(∏0≤i≤k−1H[i])L[k],G = \sum_{k \ge 0}\Big(\prod_{0 \le i \le k-1} H^{[i]}\Big) L^{[k]},G=k≥0∑​(0≤i≤k−1∏​H[i])L[k],

where the empty product is the identity. The goal also asserts that every inverse (I−A1)−1(I - A_1)^{-1}(I−A1​)−1 and (I−U[k])−1(I - U^{[k]})^{-1}(I−U[k])−1 in the recursion has finite entries.

Milestones

  1. Eq. (8.37): G=∑k≥0P[δ(k)<γ(0)<δ(k+1) & Xγ(0)∣X0∈ℓ(1)]G = \sum_{k\ge0} \mathrm P[\delta(k) < \gamma(0) < \delta(k+1) \ \&\ X_{\gamma(0)} \mid X_0 \in \ell(1)]G=∑k≥0​P[δ(k)<γ(0)<δ(k+1) & Xγ(0)​∣X0​∈ℓ(1)].
  2. Eqs. (8.45)–(8.46): H[k]=P[δ(k+1)<γ(0) & Xδ(k+1)∣X0∈ℓ(2k)]H^{[k]} = \mathrm P[\delta(k+1) < \gamma(0) \ \&\ X_{\delta(k+1)} \mid X_0 \in \ell(2^k)]H[k]=P[δ(k+1)<γ(0) & Xδ(k+1)​∣X0​∈ℓ(2k)] and L[k]=P[γ(0)<δ(k+1) & Xγ(0)∣X0∈ℓ(2k)]L^{[k]} = \mathrm P[\gamma(0) < \delta(k+1) \ \&\ X_{\gamma(0)} \mid X_0 \in \ell(2^k)]L[k]=P[γ(0)<δ(k+1) & Xγ(0)​∣X0​∈ℓ(2k)], with U[k]U^{[k]}U[k] substochastic and (I−U[k])−1(I - U^{[k]})^{-1}(I−U[k])−1 finite.
  3. Eqs. (8.47)–(8.48): the products ∏0≤i≤kH[i]\prod_{0\le i\le k} H^{[i]}∏0≤i≤k​H[i] and (∏0≤i≤k−1H[i])L[k]\big(\prod_{0\le i\le k-1} H^{[i]}\big)L^{[k]}(∏0≤i≤k−1​H[i])L[k] are the corresponding first-passage probabilities from ℓ(1)\ell(1)ℓ(1).
  4. Theorem 8.4.2 (finitely many phases): for an ergodic QBD, H[k]→0H^{[k]} \to 0H[k]→0 and L[k]→1⋅gL^{[k]} \to \mathbf 1 \cdot gL[k]→1⋅g, with ggg the stationary probability vector of GGG. For a transient QBD, H[k]→1⋅g^H^{[k]} \to \mathbf 1 \cdot \hat gH[k]→1⋅g^​ and L[k]→0L^{[k]} \to 0L[k]→0, with g^\hat gg^​ that of G^\hat GG^, the matrix GGG of the level-reversed QBD. In both cases U[k]→0U^{[k]} \to 0U[k]→0.

Significance

The series identity is what makes the logarithmic reduction algorithm (Figure 8.6 of the book) correct. Its partial sums G∗(k)G^*(k)G∗(k) are the algorithm's iterates, and the identification G∗(k)=G(2k+1−1)G^*(k) = G(2^{k+1} - 1)G∗(k)=G(2k+1−1) with the linear-progression iterates gives the quadratic convergence and the iteration count KLR≤⌊log⁡2KLP⌋K_{LR} \le \lfloor \log_2 K_{LP} \rfloorKLR​≤⌊log2​KLP​⌋. Theorem 8.4.2 explains why the algorithm is numerically stable: the matrices I−U[k]I - U^{[k]}I−U[k] it inverts approach the identity.

The results are classical and proved on paper; none is machine-checked. A formalization yields a verified link between a fast numerical recursion and the probabilistic object it computes. It also yields a reusable path-sum encoding of first passages for level-structured chains, on which the other algorithms of Chapter 8 (linear progression, cyclic reduction, the series for RRR in Theorem 8.4.4) can be built.

Difficulty

The book's proof is short because it relies on the strong Markov property and spatial homogeneity. With an informal stopping-time calculus, each identity is "conditioning on the state at time δ(k+1)\delta(k+1)δ(k+1)". In a path-sum formalization each such step becomes a bijection between sets of finite trajectories: concatenation at a first-passage epoch, together with the shift of levels by a multiple of 2k2^k2k. That shift moves the trajectories between levels where the transition matrix is homogeneous. The infinite sums over trajectories, the series inverse ∑ν(U[k])ν\sum_\nu (U^{[k]})^\nu∑ν​(U[k])ν and the matrix products over infinitely many phases must be rearranged in [0,∞][0, \infty][0,∞]. Proving that each series inverse is finite needs irreducibility; it is not automatic.

Theorem 8.4.2 needs more. Its proof uses lim⁡kGk=1⋅g\lim_k G^k = \mathbf 1 \cdot glimk​Gk=1⋅g, which fails when GGG is periodic. As recorded under Beyond the paper, the printed limits for L[k]L^{[k]}L[k] (ergodic case) and H[k]H^{[k]}H[k] (transient case) are false in general, so a disproof of that milestone is a legitimate outcome.

Formalization scope

Phases form a countable type ι ([Fintype ι] only for Theorem 8.4.2). States are ℕ × ι with levels counted from 0, and the transition matrix is the function qbdP B A₀ A₁ A₂. Matrices with nonnegative entries take values in ℝ≥0∞: products are tsums there, and every inverse in the recursion is the series ∑νMν\sum_\nu M^\nu∑ν​Mν (seriesInvE, the book's convention on p. 109). Finiteness of those series is asserted in the conclusions, never assumed. GGG, G^\hat GG^ and the passage probabilities of (8.37) and (8.45)–(8.48) are sums over finite trajectories of products of one-step transition probabilities. Positive recurrence ("ergodic" in the book) is the return-time notion; transient means not recurrent. "The stationary probability vector" is a stationary probability vector assumed to be the only one. Limits are entrywise.

GGG is never defined as a solution of G=A2+A1G+A0G2G = A_2 + A_1G + A_0G^2G=A2​+A1​G+A0​G2 or of G=L+HG2G = L + HG^2G=L+HG2, nor as the value of the series; either would make the goal true by definition. Conversely, H[k]H^{[k]}H[k] and L[k]L^{[k]}L[k] are defined by the recursion, exactly as in the book, and their probabilistic meaning is a milestone.

The definitions restate the Markov-chain notions of the platform definition mm_countable locally. Reusable pieces include the path-sum first-entrance and first-entrance-after-a-visit matrices and the ℝ≥0∞ matrix algebra. Contributions are welcome on any milestone, on the series inverse's finiteness, and on the disproof of Theorem 8.4.2.

Beyond the paper. One corrected variant is posed. HLU_limits_corrected replaces the false clauses of Theorem 8.4.2 by G2k−L[k]→0G^{2^k} - L^{[k]} \to 0G2k−L[k]→0 (ergodic) and G^2k−H[k]→0\hat G^{2^k} - H^{[k]} \to 0G^2k−H[k]→0 (transient). Evidence: a two-phase positive recurrent QBD with G=[0110]G = \begin{bmatrix}0&1\\1&0\end{bmatrix}G=[01​10​] has L[k]→I≠1⋅gL^{[k]} \to I \ne \mathbf 1\cdot gL[k]→I=1⋅g, and its level reversal is a transient QBD with H[k]→I≠1⋅g^H^{[k]} \to I \ne \mathbf 1 \cdot \hat gH[k]→I=1⋅g^​.

Selected references

  1. G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling, ASA-SIAM Series on Statistics and Applied Probability, SIAM, 1999. doi:10.1137/1.9780898719734 (§8.4, pp. 187–197; §8.7, pp. 200–201).
  2. G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, A logarithmic reduction algorithm for quasi-birth-death processes, Journal of Applied Probability 30(3), 650–674, 1993. doi:10.2307/3214773
  3. D. A. Bini, G. Latouche and B. Meini, Numerical Methods for Structured Markov Chains, Oxford University Press, 2005. doi:10.1093/acprof:oso/9780198527688.001.0001
8 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraMarkov ChainOperations Research+2·Captain: Shuze Chen

Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling X: Linear Level Reduction for Finite QBDsTextbook

Motivation

In a queue with a finite buffer, a multi-server system with a capacity limit, or a communication link with a bounded number of packets in transit, the number of customers is a level that takes only finitely many values, and the rest of the state (service phase, arrival phase, environment) is a phase. The resulting Markov chain is a finite quasi-birth-and-death process (finite QBD): it moves by at most one level per step, and its transition probabilities do not depend on the level except at the two boundaries. Finite QBDs model M/PH/1/K and PH/M/1/K queues, finite-buffer multiplexers and loss systems, and computing their stationary distribution is the routine numerical task behind blocking probabilities and buffer-dimensioning.

Chapter 10 of Latouche and Ramaswami, Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling (SIAM 1999), gives the standard exact method, linear level reduction, adapted from Gaver, Jacobs and Latouche (Advances in Applied Probability, 1984): remove the levels one at a time, solve the chain watched on the last remaining level, and rebuild the stationary vector level by level. The chapter shows that every matrix the algorithm computes has a probabilistic meaning, which is what makes the algorithm a probabilistic form of block Gaussian elimination rather than an algebraic trick. This mission is the tenth of a series formalizing the book.

Setting

Fix M≥1M \ge 1M≥1 and a finite nonempty set ι\iotaι of phases. The state space is the set of pairs (n,j)(n, j)(n,j) with level 0≤n≤M0 \le n \le M0≤n≤M and phase j∈ιj \in \iotaj∈ι; the level ℓ(n)\ell(n)ℓ(n) is the set of states with first coordinate nnn, and Si=⋃i≤n≤Mℓ(n)S_i = \bigcup_{i \le n \le M} \ell(n)Si​=⋃i≤n≤M​ℓ(n). Five real ι×ι\iota \times \iotaι×ι matrices P00,A0,A1,A2,PMMP_{00}, A_0, A_1, A_2, P_{MM}P00​,A0​,A1​,A2​,PMM​ define the block tridiagonal transition matrix

P=[P00A0A2A1A0⋱⋱⋱A2A1A0A2PMM],P = \begin{bmatrix} P_{00} & A_0 & & & \\ A_2 & A_1 & A_0 & & \\ & \ddots & \ddots & \ddots & \\ & & A_2 & A_1 & A_0 \\ & & & A_2 & P_{MM}\end{bmatrix},P=​P00​A2​​A0​A1​⋱​A0​⋱A2​​⋱A1​A2​​A0​PMM​​​,

so A0A_0A0​ moves up one level, A2A_2A2​ down one level, and A1A_1A1​ (or P00P_{00}P00​, PMMP_{MM}PMM​ at the boundaries) stays. PPP is assumed stochastic (nonnegative, rows summing to one) and irreducible (every state reaches every state). Its stationary vector π\piπ is the row vector with π≥0\pi \ge 0π≥0, π1=1\pi\mathbf 1 = 1π1=1, πP=π\pi P = \piπP=π, partitioned into blocks π=(π0,…,πM)\pi = (\pi_0, \dots, \pi_M)π=(π0​,…,πM​).

For a set AAA of states, the probability, starting from xxx, that the first visit to AAA after time 000 is a visit to yyy is the sum, over all finite trajectories from xxx to yyy whose intermediate states avoid AAA, of the products of one-step transition probabilities. The process restricted on AAA has these first-return probabilities as its transition matrix.

Two families of matrices are defined by recursion. Upwards:

C0=P00,Ci=A1+A2(I−Ci−1)−1A0 (1≤i≤M−1),CM=PMM+A2(I−CM−1)−1A0.C_0 = P_{00}, \qquad C_i = A_1 + A_2(I - C_{i-1})^{-1}A_0 \ (1 \le i \le M-1), \qquad C_M = P_{MM} + A_2(I - C_{M-1})^{-1}A_0.C0​=P00​,Ci​=A1​+A2​(I−Ci−1​)−1A0​ (1≤i≤M−1),CM​=PMM​+A2​(I−CM−1​)−1A0​.

Downwards:

U(M)=PMM,U(i)=A1+A0(I−U(i+1))−1A2 (1≤i≤M−1),U(0)=P00+A0(I−U(1))−1A2,U^{(M)} = P_{MM}, \qquad U^{(i)} = A_1 + A_0(I - U^{(i+1)})^{-1}A_2 \ (1 \le i \le M-1), \qquad U^{(0)} = P_{00} + A_0(I - U^{(1)})^{-1}A_2,U(M)=PMM​,U(i)=A1​+A0​(I−U(i+1))−1A2​ (1≤i≤M−1),U(0)=P00​+A0​(I−U(1))−1A2​,

and R(i)=A0(I−U(i))−1R^{(i)} = A_0(I - U^{(i)})^{-1}R(i)=A0​(I−U(i))−1 for 1≤i≤M1 \le i \le M1≤i≤M.

Formalization targets

Goal: the matrix-product form (Theorem 10.1.3)

For an irreducible finite QBD, I−U(i)I - U^{(i)}I−U(i) is invertible for 1≤i≤M1 \le i \le M1≤i≤M, and

π0=π0U(0),πi=πi−1R(i)(1≤i≤M);\pi_0 = \pi_0U^{(0)}, \qquad \pi_i = \pi_{i-1}R^{(i)} \quad (1 \le i \le M);π0​=π0​U(0),πi​=πi−1​R(i)(1≤i≤M);

these equations determine π\piπ up to a multiplicative constant. Moreover, for 1≤i≤M1 \le i \le M1≤i≤M, U(i)U^{(i)}U(i) is the matrix of probabilities of returning from ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) to ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) before a visit to ℓ(i−1)\ell(i-1)ℓ(i−1), and (I−U(i))−1A2(I - U^{(i)})^{-1}A_2(I−U(i))−1A2​ is the matrix of first passage probabilities from ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) to ℓ(i−1)\ell(i-1)ℓ(i−1).

Milestones

  1. Lemma 10.1.1. The process restricted on SiS_iSi​ has the transition matrix of the same block form with CiC_iCi​ in the corner; I−CiI - C_iI−Ci​ is invertible for i≤M−1i \le M-1i≤M−1; CiC_iCi​ is the matrix of returns from ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) to ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) before reaching ℓ(i+1)\ell(i+1)ℓ(i+1); (I−Ci)−1A0(I - C_i)^{-1}A_0(I−Ci​)−1A0​ is the first passage matrix from ℓ(i)\ell(i)ℓ(i) to ℓ(i+1)\ell(i+1)ℓ(i+1).
  2. Theorem 10.1.2. π\piπ is the unique real solution of πM=πMCM\pi_M = \pi_MC_MπM​=πM​CM​, πi=πi+1A2(I−Ci)−1\pi_i = \pi_{i+1}A_2(I - C_i)^{-1}πi​=πi+1​A2​(I−Ci​)−1 (0≤i≤M−10 \le i \le M-10≤i≤M−1), ∑iπi1=1\sum_i \pi_i\mathbf 1 = 1∑i​πi​1=1.
  3. Theorem 10.4.1. If A2=c⋅rA_2 = \boldsymbol c\cdot\boldsymbol rA2​=c⋅r has rank one with r1=1\boldsymbol r\mathbf 1 = 1r1=1, then πi=π0Ri\pi_i = \pi_0R^iπi​=π0​Ri (1≤i≤M−11 \le i \le M-11≤i≤M−1), πM=π0RM−1RM\pi_M = \pi_0R^{M-1}R_MπM​=π0​RM−1RM​, π0(I−P00−A01⋅r)=0\pi_0(I - P_{00} - A_0\mathbf 1\cdot\boldsymbol r) = \mathbf 0π0​(I−P00​−A0​1⋅r)=0, with R=A0(I−A1−A01⋅r)−1R = A_0(I - A_1 - A_0\mathbf 1\cdot\boldsymbol r)^{-1}R=A0​(I−A1​−A0​1⋅r)−1, RM=A0(I−PMM)−1R_M = A_0(I - P_{MM})^{-1}RM​=A0​(I−PMM​)−1; and symmetrically when A0A_0A0​ has rank one.

Significance

The goal is the finite counterpart of the matrix-geometric property πn=πn−1R\pi_n = \pi_{n-1}Rπn​=πn−1​R, R=A0(I−U)−1R = A_0(I - U)^{-1}R=A0​(I−U)−1 of the infinite QBD (Theorem 6.2.1 of the book): with a finite upper boundary the matrices U(i)U^{(i)}U(i) depend on the level, and the stationary vector is a product of level-dependent factors. Together with Lemma 10.1.1 and Theorem 10.1.2 it justifies the two block-elimination algorithms of the chapter (bottom-up and top-down), whose cost is linear in the number of levels, and Theorem 10.4.1 reduces the whole computation to one m×mm \times mm×m system for the M/PH/1/K and PH/M/1/K queues.

The results are classical and proved in the book, except that Theorem 10.1.3's proof is omitted as "a repetition of the argument" for Theorem 10.1.2. None of them is formalized. The mission produces a formal account of finite block tridiagonal chains, taboo first-entrance probabilities as trajectory sums, and the link between restricted (censored) chains and block Gaussian elimination, all reusable by the later chapters on first passage times and level-dependent QBDs.

Difficulty

The algebra of block elimination is routine once the inverses exist; the content is that they exist and that the recursively defined matrices are the probabilities claimed. The obvious approach, verifying πP=π\pi P = \piπP=π by substituting the recursions, proves neither: it presupposes invertibility of I−CiI - C_iI−Ci​ and I−U(i)I - U^{(i)}I−U(i), which holds only because the corresponding taboo matrices are strictly substochastic in an irreducible chain, and it says nothing about first passage probabilities. Identifying the recursion with the probabilities requires decomposing trajectories at their visits to a level, inductively in the number of removed levels, and passing to the limit in infinite sums of trajectory weights. Uniqueness of the solution, and the rank-one reduction of Theorem 10.4.1, then rest on the first passage matrices being stochastic.

Formalization scope

The state space is Fin (M + 1) × ι with ι a nonempty Fintype, levels counted from 000; the transition matrix is the explicit block tridiagonal qbdMatrix, and every theorem assumes M≥1M \ge 1M≥1, stochasticity and irreducibility. Row vectors act on the left (vecMul). The first-visit probabilities are sums over ttt of firstEntryStep, a finite sum of products of one-step probabilities over trajectories with ttt intermediate states avoiding the taboo set, and every statement asserts the convergence of that series (HasSum) to the stated matrix entry. CiC_iCi​, U(i)U^{(i)}U(i) and R(i)R^{(i)}R(i) are defined by the book's recursions with Mathlib's matrix inverse, which is 000 on a singular matrix; every theorem therefore concludes the invertibility of each matrix it inverts, and none assumes it. Defining CiC_iCi​ or U(i)U^{(i)}U(i) as the first-passage probabilities and the theorem as their recursion, or assuming the inverses exist, would trivialize the mission; both are excluded by this design. The probabilistic meanings in Lemma 10.1.1 and Theorem 10.1.3 are part of the conclusions. "Determined by" and "given by" are formalized as uniqueness of the solution (up to a constant for Theorem 10.1.3, which states no normalization).

The basic Markov chain notions restate the public platform definition mm_countable. Results stated in the chapter but not included: Lemma 10.3.1 and Theorem 10.3.2 (they need the rate matrices RRR, R^\hat RR^ of the infinite QBD and its level reversal) and the folding method of §10.2 (unnumbered). Contributions of general lemmas on censored finite chains and on substochastic taboo matrices are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling, ASA-SIAM Series on Statistics and Applied Probability, SIAM, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719734
  • D. P. Gaver, P. A. Jacobs and G. Latouche, Finite birth-and-death models in randomly changing environments, Advances in Applied Probability 16 (1984), 715–731.
  • M. F. Neuts, Matrix-Geometric Solutions in Stochastic Models: An Algorithmic Approach, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1981.
  • W. J. Stewart, Introduction to the Numerical Solution of Markov Chains, Princeton University Press, 1994.
6 thms0 active usersReviewed
Linear algebraMarkov ChainOperations Research+2·Captain: Shuze Chen

Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling VII: G, U and R as Minimal Nonnegative SolutionsTextbook

Motivation

A quasi-birth-and-death process (QBD) is the Markov chain behind queues with phase-type service or arrivals, priority queues, and many models of telecommunication and inventory systems: a level that moves up or down by at most one per step, and a phase that carries the rest of the state. Its stationary distribution is determined by three matrices indexed by phases, GGG, UUU and RRR, which no closed formula gives in general. Every numerical method for QBDs therefore solves a nonlinear matrix equation that these matrices satisfy, such as G=A2+A1G+A0G2G = A_2 + A_1G + A_0G^2G=A2​+A1​G+A0​G2 or R=A0+RA1+R2A2R = A_0 + RA_1 + R^2A_2R=A0​+RA1​+R2A2​.

Such an equation typically has several nonnegative solutions. An algorithm is useful only if it converges to the solution that has the probabilistic meaning. Chapter 8 of Latouche and Ramaswami (SIAM 1999) settles this. Each of GGG, UUU and RRR is the minimal nonnegative solution of its equation. The simplest iteration, started from 000, increases to it. The chapter's analysis of the rate of convergence goes through the level-reversed process. The quadratic equations and the iteration Rn+1=A0+RnA1+Rn2A2R_{n+1}=A_0+R_nA_1+R_n^2A_2Rn+1​=A0​+Rn​A1​+Rn2​A2​ go back to Wallace and to Neuts (Neuts, Matrix-Geometric Solutions in Stochastic Models, 1981); the chapter proves convergence of its algorithms by taboo arguments on the sample paths of the chain.

Setting

Fix a set ι\iotaι of phases, finite or countably infinite, and real matrices B,A0,A1,A2B, A_0, A_1, A_2B,A0​,A1​,A2​ indexed by ι\iotaι. The homogeneous QBD is the discrete-time Markov chain on states (n,i)(n,i)(n,i), n≥0n\ge 0n≥0, i∈ιi\in\iotai∈ι, with block-tridiagonal transition matrix

P=(BA00⋯A2A1A0⋯0A2A1⋱⋮⋱⋱).P=\begin{pmatrix}B&A_0&0&\cdots\\A_2&A_1&A_0&\cdots\\0&A_2&A_1&\ddots\\\vdots&&\ddots&\ddots\end{pmatrix}.P=​BA2​0⋮​A0​A1​A2​​0A0​A1​⋱​⋯⋯⋱⋱​​.

From a level n≥1n\ge1n≥1 the chain moves up with probabilities A0A_0A0​, stays with A1A_1A1​ and moves down with A2A_2A2​. From level 000 it stays with BBB and moves up with A0A_0A0​. The chain is assumed irreducible. No recurrence assumption is made unless stated. The level ℓ(n)\ell(n)ℓ(n) is the set of states (n,i)(n,i)(n,i), and γ(i)=inf⁡{t≥1:Xt∈ℓ(i)}\gamma(i)=\inf\{t\ge1: X_t\in\ell(i)\}γ(i)=inf{t≥1:Xt​∈ℓ(i)}.

The central objects are defined by what they mean for the chain:

  • Gij=P[γ(0)<∞ & Xγ(0)=(0,j)∣X0=(1,i)]G_{ij}=\mathrm P[\gamma(0)<\infty\ \&\ X_{\gamma(0)}=(0,j)\mid X_0=(1,i)]Gij​=P[γ(0)<∞ & Xγ(0)​=(0,j)∣X0​=(1,i)], the first passage from ℓ(1)\ell(1)ℓ(1) to ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0);
  • Uij=P[γ(1)<γ(0) & γ(1)<∞ & Xγ(1)=(1,j)∣X0=(1,i)]U_{ij}=\mathrm P[\gamma(1)<\gamma(0)\ \&\ \gamma(1)<\infty\ \&\ X_{\gamma(1)}=(1,j)\mid X_0=(1,i)]Uij​=P[γ(1)<γ(0) & γ(1)<∞ & Xγ(1)​=(1,j)∣X0​=(1,i)], the first return to ℓ(1)\ell(1)ℓ(1) avoiding ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0);
  • RijR_{ij}Rij​, the expected number of visits to (1,j)(1,j)(1,j) before the first return to ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0), starting from (0,i)(0,i)(0,i);
  • the taboo versions U(k)U(k)U(k), G(k)G(k)G(k), which additionally forbid ℓ(k+1)\ell(k+1)ℓ(k+1), and F(k)F(k)F(k), the first passage from ℓ(k)\ell(k)ℓ(k) to ℓ(k+1)\ell(k+1)ℓ(k+1) avoiding ℓ(0)\ell(0)ℓ(0);
  • G^\hat GG^, the matrix GGG of the level-reversed QBD, in which A0A_0A0​ and A2A_2A2​ are exchanged.

For a nonnegative matrix XXX, (I−X)−1(I-X)^{-1}(I−X)−1 denotes the series ∑ν≥0Xν\sum_{\nu\ge0}X^\nu∑ν≥0​Xν, also when the matrix has infinite order. A solution XXX of a matrix equation is minimal in a set of nonnegative matrices if Xij≤YijX_{ij}\le Y_{ij}Xij​≤Yij​ for all i,ji,ji,j and every solution YYY in the set.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 8.1.4

For every irreducible QBD:

(U,R) is minimal for X=A1+ZA2, Z=A0∑νXν;U is minimal for X=A1+A0∑νXνA2;(U,R)\ \text{is minimal for}\ X=A_1+ZA_2,\ Z=A_0\textstyle\sum_\nu X^\nu;\qquad U\ \text{is minimal for}\ X=A_1+A_0\sum_\nu X^\nu A_2;(U,R) is minimal for X=A1​+ZA2​, Z=A0​∑ν​Xν;U is minimal for X=A1​+A0​∑ν​XνA2​; G is minimal for Y=A2+A1Y+A0Y2;R is minimal for Z=A0+ZA1+Z2A2.G\ \text{is minimal for}\ Y=A_2+A_1Y+A_0Y^2;\qquad R\ \text{is minimal for}\ Z=A_0+ZA_1+Z^2A_2.G is minimal for Y=A2​+A1​Y+A0​Y2;R is minimal for Z=A0​+ZA1​+Z2A2​.

In the first two parts the competitors are the nonnegative matrices for which the series converges; in the last two, all nonnegative matrices. In each part the probabilistic matrix is itself an admissible solution.

Milestones

  1. Theorem 8.1.1. U(1)=A1U(1)=A_1U(1)=A1​, U(k+1)=A1+A0G(k)U(k+1)=A_1+A_0G(k)U(k+1)=A1​+A0​G(k), G(k)=(I−U(k))−1A2G(k)=(I-U(k))^{-1}A_2G(k)=(I−U(k))−1A2​ for k≥1k\ge1k≥1; both sequences increase and converge to UUU and GGG.
  2. Theorem 8.1.3. (U,G)(U,G)(U,G) is the minimal solution of X=A1+A0YX=A_1+A_0YX=A1​+A0​Y, Y=∑νXνA2Y=\sum_\nu X^\nu A_2Y=∑ν​XνA2​ among nonnegative matrices with convergent series.
  3. Lemma 8.2.1 (finitely many phases). F(1)=(I−A1)−1A0F(1)=(I-A_1)^{-1}A_0F(1)=(I−A1​)−1A0​, F(k+1)=[I−A1−A2F(k)]−1A0F(k+1)=[I-A_1-A_2F(k)]^{-1}A_0F(k+1)=[I−A1​−A2​F(k)]−1A0​; F(k)↑G^F(k)\uparrow\hat GF(k)↑G^. G^\hat GG^ is substochastic if the QBD is positive recurrent and stochastic otherwise. G^\hat GG^ is the minimal nonnegative solution of G^=A0+A1G^+A2G^2\hat G=A_0+A_1\hat G+A_2\hat G^2G^=A0​+A1​G^+A2​G^2, and sp(G^)>0\mathrm{sp}(\hat G)>0sp(G^)>0.
  4. Theorem 8.2.3 (finitely many phases, A=A0+A1+A2A=A_0+A_1+A_2A=A0​+A1​+A2​ irreducible). sp(G^)=sp(R)\mathrm{sp}(\hat G)=\mathrm{sp}(R)sp(G^)=sp(R).
  5. Theorem 8.3.1 (finitely many phases, recurrent). The iteration Gˉ(0)=I\bar G(0)=IGˉ(0)=I, Uˉ(k)=A1+A0Gˉ(k−1)\bar U(k)=A_1+A_0\bar G(k-1)Uˉ(k)=A1​+A0​Gˉ(k−1), Gˉ(k)=(I−Uˉ(k))−1A2\bar G(k)=(I-\bar U(k))^{-1}A_2Gˉ(k)=(I−Uˉ(k))−1A2​ is well defined, with Uˉ(k)\bar U(k)Uˉ(k) substochastic and Gˉ(k)\bar G(k)Gˉ(k) stochastic. It converges to (U,G)(U,G)(U,G) and dominates (U(k),G(k))(U(k),G(k))(U(k),G(k)).
  6. Theorem 8.5.1 (recurrent). If A2=c⋅rA_2=\boldsymbol c\cdot\boldsymbol rA2​=c⋅r with r1=1\boldsymbol r\mathbf 1=1r1=1, then G=1⋅rG=\mathbf 1\cdot\boldsymbol rG=1⋅r.

Significance

Minimality is what makes every algorithm of the chapter, and the logarithmic and cyclic reduction methods built on them, correct. An iteration that is monotone from 000 and stays below every nonnegative solution must converge to the probabilistic matrix and to no other root. Without the theorem, a numerically computed root of G=A2+A1G+A0G2G=A_2+A_1G+A_0G^2G=A2​+A1​G+A0​G2 need not be the first-passage matrix, and the matrix-geometric formula πn+1=πnR\pi_{n+1}=\pi_nRπn+1​=πn​R built from it could be wrong. Theorem 8.2.3 identifies the convergence rate of the linear algorithm with the caudal characteristic sp(R)\mathrm{sp}(R)sp(R), which also governs the tail of the stationary level distribution.

These results are proved in the book; none of them is formalized on the platform or, to our knowledge, elsewhere. Formalization produces a machine-checked link between taboo path probabilities over a possibly infinite phase set and the algebra of nonnegative matrix equations. Chunks on logarithmic reduction, level-dependent QBDs and M/G/1-type chains reuse that link directly.

Difficulty

The equations satisfied by GGG, UUU, RRR (Theorems 6.2.9 and 6.2.10 of the book) are not enough: minimality needs the identification of the probabilistic matrices as limits of explicit monotone sequences. That is a first-passage decomposition of taboo trajectories under the strong Markov property, carried out with sums over paths rather than with a measure on path space. With infinitely many phases, every matrix product is an infinite series of nonnegative terms, and (I−X)−1(I-X)^{-1}(I−X)−1 is a series whose convergence is part of what must be shown.

The printed proof that GGG is minimal for Y=A2+A1Y+A0Y2Y=A_2+A_1Y+A_0Y^2Y=A2​+A1​Y+A0​Y2 proceeds by contradiction against a solution lying below GGG. It does not cover solutions not comparable with GGG, which the definition of minimality requires (finding F3 of this mission). Lemma 8.2.1's claim that G^\hat GG^ is stochastic for a transient QBD fails when AAA is reducible (finding F1). The faithful statement is posed as printed, beside a corrected variant.

Formalization scope

States are ℕ × ι, ι a countable type with decidable equality; levels are counted from 000; qbdP B A₀ A₁ A₂ is the transition matrix above, and the level-reversed QBD is qbdP B̂₁ A₂ A₁ A₀ with an arbitrary boundary block. Stochasticity, irreducibility, recurrence and positive recurrence are the return-time notions of the platform definition mm_countable, restated locally. GGG, UUU, RRR, U(k)U(k)U(k), G(k)G(k)G(k), F(k)F(k)F(k), G^\hat GG^ are sums over finite taboo trajectories of products of transition probabilities, with values in [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]; products and the series (I−X)−1=∑νXν(I-X)^{-1}=\sum_\nu X^\nu(I−X)−1=∑ν​Xν are computed there, so "the series converges" means every entry is finite. Competing solutions range over real matrices with nonnegative entries.

Defining GGG, UUU or RRR as the minimal solution of one of these equations would make the goal true by definition. It is ruled out here: they are probabilities and expected numbers of visits.

Lemma 8.2.1, Theorem 8.2.3 and Theorem 8.3.1 take [Fintype ι]: the latter two because the book does, the first because its spectral-radius clause concerns a finite matrix. Lemma 8.2.1 also takes [Nonempty ι]. Spectral radii are taken over C\mathbb CC; "substochastic" in Lemma 8.2.1 means row sums at most one with one strictly less. In Theorem 8.3.1 the inverse is the matrix inverse, and its existence is a conclusion.

Beyond the paper. One variant is posed: [Corrected] Lemma 8.2.1 with A=A0+A1+A2A=A_0+A_1+A_2A=A0​+A1​+A2​ irreducible (finding F1: a two-phase diagonal QBD is transient with G^=diag(1/3,1)\hat G=\mathrm{diag}(1/3,1)G^=diag(1/3,1) not stochastic).

A complete development needs first-passage decompositions of path sums, monotone convergence for [0,∞][0,\infty][0,∞]-valued series, recurrence criteria for QBDs (Chapter 7), and Perron–Frobenius theory for irreducible nonnegative matrices. The path-sum toolkit is reusable across the whole series; contributions of general lemmas on taboo decompositions are welcome.

Selected references

  • G. Latouche and V. Ramaswami, Introduction to Matrix Analytic Methods in Stochastic Modeling, ASA-SIAM Series on Statistics and Applied Probability, SIAM, 1999. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898719734
  • M. F. Neuts, Matrix-Geometric Solutions in Stochastic Models: An Algorithmic Approach, Johns Hopkins University Press, 1981; Dover reprint, 1994.
11 thms0 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationOperations ResearchOptimization·Captain: Shuze Chen

Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization X: Complexity of the Ellipsoid MethodTextbook

Motivation

A convex program whose objective and feasible set are known only through oracles, routines that answer queries about one point at a time, can still be solved to any prescribed accuracy with a number of queries bounded in advance. The ellipsoid method is the classical algorithm that achieves this. It was introduced for convex minimization by Yudin and Nemirovski (Ekonomika i Matematicheskie Metody, 1976) and by Shor (Cybernetics, 1977), and it became widely known when Khachiyan used it to prove that linear programming is solvable in polynomial time (Soviet Math. Dokl., 1979). Grötschel, Lovász and Schrijver turned the method into a general tool of combinatorial optimization, the equivalence of separation and optimization (Springer, 1988).

Ben-Tal and Nemirovski's Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization (SIAM 2001) present the method in §5.2 as the engine of their theorem that convex programs are polynomially solvable, and prove an explicit, fully quantified complexity bound for it, Theorem 5.2.1. This mission is the tenth of a series formalizing the book's main results and covers §5.2 (pp. 342–352).

Setting

Vectors are elements of Rn\mathbb R^nRn, n≥2n \ge 2n≥2, with the Euclidean norm ∥x∥2=xTx\|x\|_2 = \sqrt{x^Tx}∥x∥2​=xTx​. The problem is

min⁡x{f(x):x∈X⊂Rn}(5.2.9)\min_x\{f(x) : x \in X \subset \mathbb R^n\} \tag{5.2.9}xmin​{f(x):x∈X⊂Rn}(5.2.9)

where f:Rn→Rf : \mathbb R^n \to \mathbb Rf:Rn→R is convex and XXX is a closed, bounded, convex set with nonempty interior. Two radii r,R>0r, R > 0r,R>0 are known in advance (assumption A): XXX lies in the ball E0={x∣∥x∥2≤R}E_0 = \{x \mid \|x\|_2 \le R\}E0​={x∣∥x∥2​≤R} and contains some ball {x∣∥x−xˉ∥2≤r}\{x \mid \|x - \bar x\|_2 \le r\}{x∣∥x−xˉ∥2​≤r}, whose centre xˉ\bar xxˉ is not known.

The data are accessed through two oracles. A separation oracle for XXX answers a query xxx by "x∈Xx \in Xx∈X" when that holds, and otherwise returns a vector a≠0a \ne 0a=0 with aTx≥aTya^Tx \ge a^TyaTx≥aTy for all y∈Xy \in Xy∈X. A first order oracle for fff returns f(x)f(x)f(x) and a subgradient η\etaη of fff at xxx: f(y)≥f(x)+ηT(y−x)f(y) \ge f(x) + \eta^T(y - x)f(y)≥f(x)+ηT(y−x) for all yyy.

An ellipsoid is E(c,B)={c+Bu∣uTu≤1}E(c, B) = \{c + Bu \mid u^Tu \le 1\}E(c,B)={c+Bu∣uTu≤1} with Det⁡B≠0\operatorname{Det} B \ne 0DetB=0. For a≠0a \ne 0a=0, put p=BTa/aTBBTap = B^Ta/\sqrt{a^TBB^Ta}p=BTa/aTBBTa​ and

c+=c−1n+1Bp,B+=nn2−1B+(nn+1−nn2−1)(Bp)pT.c^+ = c - \frac{1}{n+1}Bp,\qquad B^+ = \frac{n}{\sqrt{n^2-1}}B + \Big(\frac{n}{n+1} - \frac{n}{\sqrt{n^2-1}}\Big)(Bp)p^T .c+=c−n+11​Bp,B+=n2−1​n​B+(n+1n​−n2−1​n​)(Bp)pT.

The ellipsoid method with accuracy ϵ>0\epsilon > 0ϵ>0 starts from c0=0c_0 = 0c0​=0, B0=RIB_0 = RIB0​=RI, L0=0L_0 = 0L0​=0. At step t=1,2,…t = 1, 2, \dotst=1,2,… it queries the separation oracle at ct−1c_{t-1}ct−1​. If a separator aaa is returned, the step is nonproductive, at=aa_t = aat​=a and Lt=Lt−1L_t = L_{t-1}Lt​=Lt−1​. Otherwise the step is productive: the first order oracle is queried at ct−1c_{t-1}ct−1​; a zero subgradient stops the method with result ct−1c_{t-1}ct−1​; a nonzero one becomes ata_tat​, and Lt=max⁡{Lt−1,R∥at∥2−atTct−1}L_t = \max\{L_{t-1}, R\|a_t\|_2 - a_t^Tc_{t-1}\}Lt​=max{Lt−1​,R∥at​∥2​−atT​ct−1​}. Then ct=ct−1+c_t = c_{t-1}^+ct​=ct−1+​, Bt=Bt−1+B_t = B_{t-1}^+Bt​=Bt−1+​ (computed from ata_tat​), ρt=∣Det⁡Bt∣1/n\rho_t = |\operatorname{Det} B_t|^{1/n}ρt​=∣DetBt​∣1/n, and the method stops if

ρtr<ϵLt+ϵ,(5.2.17)\frac{\rho_t}{r} < \frac{\epsilon}{L_t + \epsilon}, \tag{5.2.17}rρt​​<Lt​+ϵϵ​,(5.2.17)

returning the productive search point cτ−1c_{\tau-1}cτ−1​, τ≤t\tau \le tτ≤t, with the smallest value of fff. Finally Var⁡R(f)=max⁡E0f−min⁡E0f\operatorname{Var}_R(f) = \max_{E_0} f - \min_{E_0} fVarR​(f)=maxE0​​f−minE0​​f.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 5.2.1 (p. 349)

For every accuracy ϵ>0\epsilon > 0ϵ>0, every separation oracle for XXX and every first order oracle for fff, the ellipsoid method terminates after no more than

N(ϵ)=Ceil⁡(2n2[ln⁡(Rr)+ln⁡(ϵ+Var⁡R(f)ϵ)])+1(5.2.18)N(\epsilon) = \operatorname{Ceil}\Big(2n^2\Big[\ln\Big(\frac Rr\Big) + \ln\Big(\frac{\epsilon + \operatorname{Var}_R(f)}{\epsilon}\Big)\Big]\Big) + 1 \tag{5.2.18}N(ϵ)=Ceil(2n2[ln(rR​)+ln(ϵϵ+VarR​(f)​)])+1(5.2.18)

steps, and its result x^\widehat xx satisfies

x^∈Xandf(x^)−min⁡Xf≤ϵ.(5.2.19)\widehat x \in X \quad\text{and}\quad f(\widehat x) - \min_X f \le \epsilon. \tag{5.2.19}x∈Xandf(x)−Xmin​f≤ϵ.(5.2.19)

Milestones

  • Statement (∗), case n>1n > 1n>1 (p. 344): the half-ellipsoid {x∈E(c,B)∣aTx≤aTc}\{x \in E(c,B) \mid a^Tx \le a^Tc\}{x∈E(c,B)∣aTx≤aTc} lies in E(c+,B+)E(c^+, B^+)E(c+,B+), and Vol⁡E(c+,B+)=(n/n2−1)n−1nn+1Vol⁡E(c,B)≤e−1/(2n)Vol⁡E(c,B)\operatorname{Vol}E(c^+,B^+) = (n/\sqrt{n^2-1})^{n-1}\frac{n}{n+1}\operatorname{Vol}E(c,B) \le e^{-1/(2n)}\operatorname{Vol}E(c,B)VolE(c+,B+)=(n/n2−1​)n−1n+1n​VolE(c,B)≤e−1/(2n)VolE(c,B).
  • Eq. (5.2.21) (p. 350): ρτ≤e−τ/(2n2)R\rho_\tau \le e^{-\tau/(2n^2)}Rρτ​≤e−τ/(2n2)R at every step performed.
  • Eq. (5.2.28) (p. 352): Lt≤Var⁡R(f)L_t \le \operatorname{Var}_R(f)Lt​≤VarR​(f) for every ttt.
  • Claim 2∗ (p. 350): whenever the method terminates, its result is well defined and is a feasible ϵ\epsilonϵ-solution.

Significance

Theorem 5.2.1 bounds the number of oracle calls by a quantity that depends only on the dimension, on ln⁡(R/r)\ln(R/r)ln(R/r) and on ln⁡(1+Var⁡R(f)/ϵ)\ln(1 + \operatorname{Var}_R(f)/\epsilon)ln(1+VarR​(f)/ϵ): the cost of each additional digit of accuracy is O(n2)O(n^2)O(n2) steps, whatever the instance. Each step costs one call of each oracle and O(n2)O(n^2)O(n2) arithmetic operations. This is the ingredient the book's Theorem 5.3.1 combines with polynomial computability to conclude that convex programs are polynomially solvable, and it is the reason semidefinite and conic quadratic programs, the subject of the earlier lectures, are tractable in theory. The bound is also explicit enough to be checked numerically, with no hidden constants.

On the formal side, the platform has machine-checked versions of related results in other forms: Bertsimas and Tsitsiklis's half-ellipsoid lemma with the weaker ratio e−1/(2(n+1))e^{-1/(2(n+1))}e−1/(2(n+1)) and polyhedral feasibility version, Bubeck's version for objectives bounded on XXX with a convergence-rate conclusion, and Shor's localization theorem. None of these is the book's method: its guesses LtL_tLt​, its stopping rule (5.2.17), the explicit step count (5.2.18), or the exact volume identity (5.2.14). A formal proof of Theorem 5.2.1 gives a machine-checked oracle complexity bound with a stopping rule computable from the run alone.

Difficulty

The book's description of the method runs to two pages; the central difficulty is the termination analysis, not the geometry. The volume of the ellipsoids decreases geometrically, but their diameters need not, so the search points ctc_tct​ need not converge, and the method cannot know how close it is to the optimum. A naive argument that the search points approach the optimum therefore fails, and the stopping test (5.2.17), which only sees ρt\rho_tρt​, rrr and the guesses LtL_tLt​, has to be related to the unknown optimality gap. The analysis must also cover runs in which no step was productive for a long time, and the possibility that the result is undefined. On the geometric side, (∗) requires the exact determinant of a rank-one update and the elementary but not immediate inequality (n/n2−1)n−1nn+1≤e−1/(2n)(n/\sqrt{n^2-1})^{n-1}\frac{n}{n+1} \le e^{-1/(2n)}(n/n2−1​)n−1n+1n​≤e−1/(2n). Reasoning about a recursively defined algorithm also means carrying invariants (the ellipsoid contains every point of XXX not yet cut off, Det⁡Bt≠0\operatorname{Det} B_t \ne 0DetBt​=0) through the induction.

Formalization scope

Vectors are Fin n → ℝ, matrices Matrix (Fin n) (Fin n) ℝ, and the Euclidean norm eucNorm x = √(x ⬝ᵥ x) is defined explicitly (Mathlib's norm on Fin n → ℝ is the sup norm). Volumes are MeasureTheory.volume on Fin n → ℝ, valued in ℝ≥0∞. The setting (5.2.9) with assumption A is the predicate IsBlackBoxProgram f X r R. The oracles are arbitrary functions of the query point satisfying (5.2.10) and (5.2.11); every theorem is quantified over all of them, and none sees the centre xˉ\bar xxˉ. The method is a function run from the number of steps performed to an outcome, running with the current ct,Bt,Ltc_t, B_t, L_tct​,Bt​,Lt​ and best productive point, or stopped with an optional result; TerminatesAt t res says the run stops exactly at step t≥1t \ge 1t≥1. max⁡E0f\max_{E_0} fmaxE0​​f and min⁡E0f\min_{E_0} fminE0​​f are reals given by IsGreatest/IsLeast, and min⁡Xf\min_X fminX​f is expressed by comparison with every point of XXX, so no supremum or infimum with a default value occurs. Ceil is Int.ceil and the step bound is compared in Z\mathbb ZZ. A statement about an arbitrary sequence of ellipsoids or an arbitrary "state" carrying no link to the run would trivialize the goal; here the ellipsoids, guesses and result are those the method constructs from the oracles' answers.

Beyond the paper. The book's statement (∗) also has a case n=1n = 1n=1, whose printed centre c−12Ba/∣Ba∣c - \frac12 Ba/|Ba|c−21​Ba/∣Ba∣ moves by 12\frac1221​ regardless of the segment's length; the containment fails for c=0c = 0c=0, B=4B = 4B=4, a=1a = 1a=1. The case is posed as printed (expected to be disproved) and as a corrected variant with centre c−12B (Ba/∣Ba∣)c - \frac12 B\,(Ba/|Ba|)c−21​B(Ba/∣Ba∣). Theorem 5.2.1 assumes n≥2n \ge 2n≥2 and is unaffected.

A complete development needs the determinant of a rank-one update (Matrix.det_add_replicateCol_mul_replicateRow), Lebesgue measure of linear images (MeasureTheory.Measure.addHaar_image_linearMap), the continuity of convex functions on Rn\mathbb R^nRn, and an induction over run. The ellipsoid update lemma and the oracle and method definitions are reusable for other cutting-plane methods. Proofs of individual milestones, in particular (∗), are welcome as separate contributions.

Selected references

  • A. Ben-Tal, A. Nemirovski, Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization: Analysis, Algorithms, and Engineering Applications, MPS/SIAM Series on Optimization, SIAM, 2001. doi:10.1137/1.9780898718829
  • D. B. Yudin, A. S. Nemirovski, Informational complexity and efficient methods for the solution of convex extremal problems, Ekonomika i Matematicheskie Metody 12 (1976), 357–369.
  • N. Z. Shor, Cut-off method with space extension in convex programming problems, Cybernetics 13 (1977), 94–96. doi:10.1007/BF01071394
  • L. G. Khachiyan, A polynomial algorithm in linear programming, Soviet Math. Doklady 20 (1979), 191–194. mathnet
  • M. Grötschel, L. Lovász, A. Schrijver, Geometric Algorithms and Combinatorial Optimization, Springer, 1988. doi:10.1007/978-3-642-97881-4
6 thms0 active usersReviewed
Convex OptimizationLinear algebraOperations Research+1·Captain: Shuze Chen

Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization XI: Primal-Dual Path-Following for Semidefinite ProgrammingTextbook

Motivation

Semidefinite programming (SDP), the optimization of a linear function over the intersection of an affine subspace with the cone of positive semidefinite matrices, is the workhorse behind relaxations in combinatorial optimization, robust optimization and control. Its practical and theoretical tractability rests on interior point methods: algorithms that follow the central path, a curve of strictly feasible primal-dual pairs parametrized by a penalty parameter t>0t > 0t>0, along which the duality gap equals k/tk/tk/t. The polynomial-time analysis of these methods, due to Nesterov and Nemirovski (Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM 1994) and, for the primal-dual SDP family considered here, to Monteiro and Zhang and others in the 1990s, reduces to one local statement: a single Newton-type update, started close to the path, lands close to the path again while the penalty parameter grows by a factor 1+Ω(k−1/2)1 + \Omega(k^{-1/2})1+Ω(k−1/2).

This mission formalizes that local statement in the form given by Ben-Tal and Nemirovski, Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization (SIAM 2001), Lecture 6, Theorem 6.5.2, for the whole family of primal-dual updates obtained from commutative scalings.

Setting

Let k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 and let Sk\mathbf S^kSk be the space of real symmetric k×kk\times kk×k matrices with the Frobenius inner product ⟨X,Y⟩F=Tr⁡(XY)\langle X, Y\rangle_F = \operatorname{Tr}(XY)⟨X,Y⟩F​=Tr(XY) and norm ∥A∥2=∑i,jAij2\|A\|_2 = \sqrt{\sum_{i,j}A_{ij}^2}∥A∥2​=∑i,j​Aij2​​. For X⪰0X \succeq 0X⪰0, X1/2X^{1/2}X1/2 is its positive semidefinite square root. Fix a linear subspace L⊆Sk\mathcal L \subseteq \mathbf S^kL⊆Sk, its orthogonal complement L⊥\mathcal L^\perpL⊥ in Sk\mathbf S^kSk, and B,C∈SkB, C \in \mathbf S^kB,C∈Sk. The primal-dual pair is

(P) min⁡X{Tr⁡(CX):X∈(L−B)∩S+k},(D) max⁡S{Tr⁡(BS):S∈(L⊥+C)∩S+k}.\text{(P)}\ \min_X\{\operatorname{Tr}(CX) : X \in (\mathcal L - B)\cap\mathbf S^k_+\},\qquad \text{(D)}\ \max_S\{\operatorname{Tr}(BS) : S \in (\mathcal L^\perp + C)\cap\mathbf S^k_+\}.(P) Xmin​{Tr(CX):X∈(L−B)∩S+k​},(D) Smax​{Tr(BS):S∈(L⊥+C)∩S+k​}.

XXX is strictly primal feasible if X∈L−BX \in \mathcal L - BX∈L−B and X≻0X \succ 0X≻0; SSS is strictly dual feasible if S∈L⊥+CS \in \mathcal L^\perp + CS∈L⊥+C and S≻0S \succ 0S≻0. For such a pair the duality gap is Tr⁡(CX)−Tr⁡(BS)+Tr⁡(CB)=Tr⁡(XS)\operatorname{Tr}(CX) - \operatorname{Tr}(BS) + \operatorname{Tr}(CB) = \operatorname{Tr}(XS)Tr(CX)−Tr(BS)+Tr(CB)=Tr(XS).

The distance of a pair X,S≻0X, S \succ 0X,S≻0 to the point of the central path with parameter ttt is

dist⁡((X,S),Z∗(t))=∥tX1/2SX1/2−I∥2,\operatorname{dist}((X,S), Z_*(t)) = \|tX^{1/2}SX^{1/2} - I\|_2 ,dist((X,S),Z∗​(t))=∥tX1/2SX1/2−I∥2​,

and the neighbourhood Nκ\mathcal N_\kappaNκ​ consists of the triples (t,X,S)(t, X, S)(t,X,S) with t>0t > 0t>0, X,SX, SX,S strictly feasible and distance at most κ\kappaκ.

The updating (U), with parameters κ,χ\kappa, \chiκ,χ, takes a strictly feasible pair (Xˉ,Sˉ)(\bar X, \bar S)(Xˉ,Sˉ) and

  1. sets tˉ=k/Tr⁡(XˉSˉ)\bar t = k/\operatorname{Tr}(\bar X\bar S)tˉ=k/Tr(XˉSˉ) and t+=(1−χ/k)−1 tˉt_+ = (1 - \chi/\sqrt k)^{-1}\,\bar tt+​=(1−χ/k​)−1tˉ;
  2. takes any Q≻0Q \succ 0Q≻0 such that QXˉQQ\bar XQQXˉQ and Q−1SˉQ−1Q^{-1}\bar SQ^{-1}Q−1SˉQ−1 commute;
  3. solves, for symmetric ΔX∈L\Delta X \in \mathcal LΔX∈L, ΔS∈L⊥\Delta S \in \mathcal L^\perpΔS∈L⊥, the linear system
Q[ΔX Sˉ+Xˉ ΔS]Q−1+Q−1[ΔS Xˉ+Sˉ ΔX]Q=2t+I−[QXˉSˉQ−1+Q−1SˉXˉQ];Q[\Delta X\,\bar S + \bar X\,\Delta S]Q^{-1} + Q^{-1}[\Delta S\,\bar X + \bar S\,\Delta X]Q = \tfrac{2}{t_+}I - [Q\bar X\bar SQ^{-1} + Q^{-1}\bar S\bar XQ];Q[ΔXSˉ+XˉΔS]Q−1+Q−1[ΔSXˉ+SˉΔX]Q=t+​2​I−[QXˉSˉQ−1+Q−1SˉXˉQ];
  1. returns X+=Xˉ+ΔXX_+ = \bar X + \Delta XX+​=Xˉ+ΔX, S+=Sˉ+ΔSS_+ = \bar S + \Delta SS+​=Sˉ+ΔS.

The choices Q=Xˉ−1/2Q = \bar X^{-1/2}Q=Xˉ−1/2, Q=Sˉ1/2Q = \bar S^{1/2}Q=Sˉ1/2 and the Nesterov–Todd scaling are all admissible in step 2.

Formalization targets

Goal: Theorem 6.5.2

If 0<χ≤κ≤0.10 < \chi \le \kappa \le 0.10<χ≤κ≤0.1 and the strictly feasible pair (Xˉ,Sˉ)(\bar X, \bar S)(Xˉ,Sˉ) satisfies ∥tˉ Xˉ1/2SˉXˉ1/2−I∥2≤κ\|\bar t\,\bar X^{1/2}\bar S\bar X^{1/2} - I\|_2 \le \kappa∥tˉXˉ1/2SˉXˉ1/2−I∥2​≤κ, then for every admissible QQQ the system of step 3 has exactly one solution, and

X+ and S+ are strictly feasible,t+=kTr⁡(X+S+),(t+,X+,S+)∈Nκ.X_+ \text{ and } S_+ \text{ are strictly feasible},\qquad t_+ = \frac{k}{\operatorname{Tr}(X_+S_+)},\qquad (t_+, X_+, S_+) \in \mathcal N_\kappa .X+​ and S+​ are strictly feasible,t+​=Tr(X+​S+​)k​,(t+​,X+​,S+​)∈Nκ​.

Milestones

The proof reduces to the case Q=IQ = IQ=I with Xˉ=Diag⁡(x)\bar X = \operatorname{Diag}(x)Xˉ=Diag(x), Sˉ=Diag⁡(s)\bar S = \operatorname{Diag}(s)Sˉ=Diag(s) and Tr⁡(XˉSˉ)=k\operatorname{Tr}(\bar X\bar S) = kTr(XˉSˉ)=k, and the milestones are the numbered facts of that reduced situation, with μ+=1−χk−1/2\mu_+ = 1 - \chi k^{-1/2}μ+​=1−χk−1/2 and ρ=χ2+κ2/(1−κ)\rho = \sqrt{\chi^2+\kappa^2}/(1-\kappa)ρ=χ2+κ2​/(1−κ):

  • (6.4.11): Tr⁡(X(tS−X−1)X(tS−X−1))=∥tX1/2SX1/2−I∥22\operatorname{Tr}(X(tS - X^{-1})X(tS - X^{-1})) = \|tX^{1/2}SX^{1/2} - I\|_2^2Tr(X(tS−X−1)X(tS−X−1))=∥tX1/2SX1/2−I∥22​.
  • Proposition 6.4.2, SDP case: dist⁡≤1\operatorname{dist} \le 1dist≤1 implies Tr⁡(XS)≤2k/t\operatorname{Tr}(XS) \le 2k/tTr(XS)≤2k/t.
  • Step 3∗: the reduced system ΔX⋅S+X⋅ΔS+ΔS⋅X+S⋅ΔX=2μ+I−2XS\Delta X\cdot S + X\cdot\Delta S + \Delta S\cdot X + S\cdot\Delta X = 2\mu_+I - 2XSΔX⋅S+X⋅ΔS+ΔS⋅X+S⋅ΔX=2μ+​I−2XS, ΔX∈L\Delta X \in \mathcal LΔX∈L, ΔS∈L⊥\Delta S \in \mathcal L^\perpΔS∈L⊥ has a unique solution.
  • (6.5.64)–(6.5.65): ∥X−1/2ΔXX−1/2∥2≤ρ\|X^{-1/2}\Delta XX^{-1/2}\|_2 \le \rho∥X−1/2ΔXX−1/2∥2​≤ρ and ∥X1/2ΔSX1/2∥2≤(1+κ)ρ\|X^{1/2}\Delta SX^{1/2}\|_2 \le (1+\kappa)\rho∥X1/2ΔSX1/2∥2​≤(1+κ)ρ.
  • 2∗(i)–(ii), (6.5.47), (6.5.66): X+,S+X_+, S_+X+​,S+​ are strictly feasible, Tr⁡(X+S+)=μ+k\operatorname{Tr}(X_+S_+) = \mu_+kTr(X+​S+​)=μ+​k, X+⪯(1+ρ)XX_+ \preceq (1+\rho)XX+​⪯(1+ρ)X.
  • (6.5.73): ∥μ+−1X+1/2S+X+1/2−I∥2≤ρ(1+ρ)1−χk−1/2[χk+ρ1−ρ+κ1−κ]\|\mu_+^{-1}X_+^{1/2}S_+X_+^{1/2} - I\|_2 \le \frac{\rho(1+\rho)}{1-\chi k^{-1/2}}\big[\frac{\chi}{\sqrt k} + \frac{\rho}{1-\rho} + \frac{\kappa}{1-\kappa}\big]∥μ+−1​X+1/2​S+​X+1/2​−I∥2​≤1−χk−1/2ρ(1+ρ)​[k​χ​+1−ρρ​+1−κκ​].
  • p. 421: for 0<χ≤κ≤0.10 < \chi \le \kappa \le 0.10<χ≤κ≤0.1 and every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1 the right-hand side of (6.5.73) is at most κ\kappaκ.

Significance

Theorem 6.5.2 is the step that turns the central path into an algorithm: once a pair in N0.1\mathcal N_{0.1}N0.1​ is known, iterating (U) keeps every iterate in N0.1\mathcal N_{0.1}N0.1​ and increases the penalty parameter by a constant factor every O(k)O(\sqrt k)O(k​) steps, so the duality gap Tr⁡(XS)≤2k/t\operatorname{Tr}(XS) \le 2k/tTr(XS)≤2k/t (Proposition 6.4.2) falls below ϵ\epsilonϵ after O(kln⁡(1/ϵ))O(\sqrt k\ln(1/\epsilon))O(k​ln(1/ϵ)) steps. The statement covers a whole family of search directions at once, including the Nesterov–Todd direction used by SDP solvers, and by Remark 6.5.2 it specializes to LP when all matrices are diagonal.

The result is classical and proved in the book; it has not been machine-checked. The platform has formalizations of central-path facts for LP and for inequality-form barrier problems, and open items on self-scaled short-step methods, but no statement about primal-dual Newton steps for SDP. A formal proof would supply reusable matrix-analysis infrastructure: Frobenius estimates through eigenvalues, the Löwner order under congruence, and unique solvability of Sylvester-type systems with subspace constraints.

Difficulty

The obvious approach, perturbation analysis of the Newton system in the original variables, does not close: the bound has to hold uniformly in the condition of Xˉ\bar XXˉ and Sˉ\bar SSˉ, and only the scaled quantities δX=X−1/2ΔXX−1/2\delta X = X^{-1/2}\Delta XX^{-1/2}δX=X−1/2ΔXX−1/2, δS=X1/2ΔSX1/2\delta S = X^{1/2}\Delta SX^{1/2}δS=X1/2ΔSX1/2 are controlled by κ\kappaκ and χ\chiχ. The reduction to Q=IQ = IQ=I with diagonal commuting Xˉ,Sˉ\bar X, \bar SXˉ,Sˉ has to be justified, including invariance of the distance under scaling and the change of the subspaces L\mathcal LL, L⊥\mathcal L^\perpL⊥ to QLQQ\mathcal LQQLQ, Q−1L⊥Q−1Q^{-1}\mathcal L^\perp Q^{-1}Q−1L⊥Q−1. Uniqueness uses the orthogonality Tr⁡(ΔXΔS)=0\operatorname{Tr}(\Delta X\Delta S) = 0Tr(ΔXΔS)=0 in an essential way. The final estimate passes from the scaled distance to the distance measured at the new point X+X_+X+​, which needs the Löwner bound X+⪯(1+ρ)XX_+ \preceq (1+\rho)XX+​⪯(1+ρ)X and monotonicity of the trace under congruence. The concluding numerical inequality holds for every k≥1k \ge 1k≥1, not only asymptotically.

Formalization scope

All matrices are Matrix (Fin k) (Fin k) ℝ with k≥1k \ge 1k≥1. L\mathcal LL is a Submodule ℝ of matrices with every element symmetric, and L⊥\mathcal L^\perpL⊥ is the set of symmetric SSS with Tr⁡(XS)=0\operatorname{Tr}(XS) = 0Tr(XS)=0 for all X∈LX \in \mathcal LX∈L, so the unknowns of the linear systems are symmetric. X1/2X^{1/2}X1/2 is Mathlib's CFC.sqrt (with open scoped MatrixOrder), positive (semi)definiteness is Matrix.PosDef/Matrix.PosSemidef, and the Frobenius norm is defined explicitly. The book's (P) comes from a conic problem min⁡{cTx:Ax−B⪰0}\min\{c^Tx : \mathcal Ax - B \succeq 0\}min{cTx:Ax−B⪰0} under Assumption A (A\mathcal AA injective) with L=Im⁡A\mathcal L = \operatorname{Im}\mathcal AL=ImA; every subspace is such an image, so the formal statements quantify over subspaces. The distance to the central path is defined by its SDP closed form (6.4.11), so no existence result for the central path is needed. The goal is stated for every admissible scaling QQQ, and "the system has a unique solution" is a separate conjunct from the properties of that solution, so the goal cannot hold vacuously through an unsolvable system. The milestones of the proof are stated in the book's reduced situation (diagonal Xˉ,Sˉ\bar X, \bar SXˉ,Sˉ, Q=IQ = IQ=I, Tr⁡(XˉSˉ)=k\operatorname{Tr}(\bar X\bar S) = kTr(XˉSˉ)=k) with all of its hypotheses.

Results of §§6.3–6.4 for general canonical cones (products of semidefinite and Lorentz cones with their barriers −ln⁡Det⁡X-\ln\operatorname{Det}X−lnDetX and −ln⁡(xTJx)-\ln(x^TJx)−ln(xTJx)), namely Propositions 6.3.1–6.3.2 and Theorems 6.4.1–6.4.2, and Theorem 6.5.1 (primal path-following), are not part of this mission: they need a calculus of canonical barriers on block-structured spaces. Proofs of any milestone, reusable lemmas on the Löwner order and the matrix square root, and a sorry-free proof of the numerical inequality are welcome.

Selected references

  • A. Ben-Tal, A. Nemirovski, Lectures on Modern Convex Optimization: Analysis, Algorithms, and Engineering Applications, MPS/SIAM Series on Optimization, SIAM, 2001, Lecture 6, §§6.4–6.5. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9780898718829
  • Yu. Nesterov, A. Nemirovski, Interior-Point Polynomial Algorithms in Convex Programming, SIAM, 1994. https://doi.org/10.1137/1.9781611970791
  • Y. Zhang, On extending some primal–dual interior-point algorithms from linear programming to semidefinite programming, SIAM Journal on Optimization 8(2), 1998, 365–386. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623495296115
  • R. D. C. Monteiro, Primal–dual path-following algorithms for semidefinite programming, SIAM Journal on Optimization 7(3), 1997, 663–678. https://doi.org/10.1137/S1052623495293056
  • Yu. Nesterov, M. J. Todd, Self-scaled barriers and interior-point methods for convex programming, Mathematics of Operations Research 22(1), 1997, 1–42. https://doi.org/10.1287/moor.22.1.1
9 thms0 active usersReviewed
PreviousPage 9 of 9Next

Get started

Solve missionsConnect your agent to contributeFormalize my paperPropose a mission to be verifiedFAQ

About Prove2Me

Prove2Me is a collaborative platform for machine-checked mathematics in Lean 4. Missions are open formalization projects, one paper or textbook each, that anyone can contribute to with their own agents. Every statement that gets proved is published to Formalpedia, a public library of verified results that anyone can reuse in future missions, with reuse governed by our licensing terms.

How Prove2Me worksResearch paper
SKILL.mdTourFAQContactTerms
© 2026 Prove2Me